[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2016024096A1 - Antibacterial compounds - Google Patents

Antibacterial compounds Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016024096A1
WO2016024096A1 PCT/GB2015/052303 GB2015052303W WO2016024096A1 WO 2016024096 A1 WO2016024096 A1 WO 2016024096A1 GB 2015052303 W GB2015052303 W GB 2015052303W WO 2016024096 A1 WO2016024096 A1 WO 2016024096A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
compound
ethyl
piperidin
amino
independently
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/GB2015/052303
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Andrew Ratcliffe
Ian Cooper
Mark Pichowicz
Neil STOKES
Cedric Charrier
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Redx Pharma Ltd
Original Assignee
Redx Pharma Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from GBGB1414205.3A external-priority patent/GB201414205D0/en
Priority claimed from GB201417941A external-priority patent/GB201417941D0/en
Application filed by Redx Pharma Ltd filed Critical Redx Pharma Ltd
Publication of WO2016024096A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016024096A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/04Ortho-condensed systems
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04Antibacterial agents
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D498/00Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D498/02Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D498/04Ortho-condensed systems

Definitions

  • This invention relates to antibacterial drug compounds containing a tricyclic ring system. It also relates to pharmaceutical formulations of antibacterial drug compounds. It also relates to uses of the derivatives in treating bacterial infections and in methods of treating bacterial infections. The invention is also directed to antibacterial drug compounds which are capable of treating bacterial infections which are currently hard to treat with existing drug compounds. Such infections are frequently referred to as resistant strains.
  • antibiotic resistant Gram-negative strains such as either Escherichia coli NDM-1 (New Delhi metallo- ⁇ -lactamase) or Klebsiella pneumoniae NDM-1 , are also very difficult to treat. Frequently only expensive antibiotics such as vancomycin and colistin are effective against these strains.
  • the fluoroquinolone antibacterial family are synthetic broad-spectrum antibiotics. They were originally introduced to treat Gram-negative bacterial infections, but are also used for the treatment of Gram-positive strains.
  • One problem with existing fluoroquinolones can be the negative side effects that may sometimes occur as a result of fluoroquinolone use. In general, the common side-effects are mild to moderate but, on occasion, more serious adverse effects occur.
  • Some of the serious side effects that occur, and which occur more commonly with fluoroquinolones than with other antibiotic drug classes, include central nervous system (CNS) toxicity and cardiotoxicity. In cases of acute overdose there may be renal failure and seizure.
  • CNS central nervous system
  • Gonorrhoea is a human sexually-transmitted infection (STI) caused by the Gram-negative bacterium Neisseria gonorrhoeae, a species of the genus Neisseria that also includes the pathogen N. meningitidis, which is one of the aetiological agents of meningitis. Untreated infection can result in a range of clinical complications including urethritis, dysuria, epididymitis, pelvic inflammatory disease, cervicitis, endometritis and even infertility and ectopic pregnancy.
  • STI human sexually-transmitted infection
  • gonorrhoea can also spread to the blood to cause disseminated gonococcal infection that can manifest as arthritis, endocarditis or meningitis.
  • Human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) is more readily-transmitted in individuals co-infected with gonorrhoea.
  • gonorrhoea Throughout the twentieth and twenty-first centuries gonorrhoea has been treated with a range of antibiotics. The sulphonamides were the first antibiotics used for the treatment of gonorrhoea, followed by penicillin, tetracycline and spectinomycin. In each case the development of resistance to these drugs by N. gonorrhoeae led to their use being discontinued.
  • TB Another disease in which the development of resistance and multidrug resistance is of particular concern is TB.
  • Mycobacterium tuberculosis Mycobacteria are aerobic bacteria and, as a result, tuberculosis infections most often develop in the lungs (pulmonary tuberculosis), although this is not always the case.
  • Mycobacteria lack an outer cell membrane and as such they are often classified as Gram-positive bacteria, although they are in many ways atypical.
  • MDR-TB multidrug-resistant TB
  • MDR-TB is the term typically used to refer to TB which has developed a resistance to isoniazid and rifampicin. MDR-TB can also be resistant to fluoroquinolones and also to the so-called 'second line' injectable anti-TB drugs: kanamycin, capreomycin and amikacin, with such resistances again commonly developing due to interruptions in treatment regimes. Where a strain of TB is resistant to isoniazid and rifampicin as well as one fluoroquinolone and one of the injectable anti-TB drugs, it is known as extensively drug resistant (XDR-TB).
  • XDR-TB extensively drug resistant
  • MDR-TB and XDR-TB are often found in those who have been previously treated for TB, but these forms of TB are just as infectious as wild-type TB and the incidence of MDR-TB and XDR-TB around the world is increasing.
  • infections arising from XDR-TB had at that time been identified in 84 different countries.
  • strains of TB which were resistant to all drugs tested against them (so-called 'totally drug resistant tuberculosis', TDR-TB).
  • the 'second line' anti-TB drugs and other antibiotics typically used to treat resistant infections can have unfavourable side effects.
  • Bacterial resistance is also becoming a problem in the treatment of animals. Antibacterials find widespread use in industrial farming, e.g. to prevent mastitis in dairy cattle, where they are often used prophylactically. Such widespread prophylactic use has led to the build-up of resistance in certain bacterial strains which are particularly relevant to animal health.
  • the invention provides a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or N-oxide thereof:
  • R 1 is selected from R 2 or R 3
  • R 2 represents the group:
  • X 1 and X 2 are each independently selected from: N and CR 4 ;
  • X 4 is selected from N, NR 2 , NR 3 , CR 2 and CR 4 ; wherein a single one of R 1 and X 4 comprises the group R 2 ; and wherein no more than two of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 are N;
  • L 1 is a linker group having the form -(CR 9 R 9 ) r U 1 -U 2 -(CR 9 R 9 )s-U 3 -(CR 9 R 10 ) r ; wherein U 1 , U 2 and U 3 are each independently selected from: a bond, CO, O, S and NR 11 ; wherein r, s, and t are each independently an integer selected from 0, 1 , 2 and 3 and wherein definitions of r, s, t, U 1 , U 2 and U 3 are chosen such that the total length of the linker group is 1 , 2, 3 or 4 atoms;
  • L 2 is 4-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl ring or a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7- membered heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • L 3 is absent or is -N(R 8 )L 4 -;
  • L 4 is independently selected from -CR 9 R 9 - and a 3-, 4- or 5-membered cycloalkyl ring or a 4- or 5-membered heterocycloalkyl ring;
  • R 3 and R 11 are each independently at each occurrence selected from: H, C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C 1 -C 4 - haloalkyl, S(O)2-C 1 -C 4 -alkyl and C(O)-C 1 -C 4 -alkyl;
  • R 4 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, halo, nitro, cyano, NR 6 R 11 , NR 6 S(O) 2 R 6 , NR 6 CONR 6 R 6 , NR 6 C(O)R 6 , NR 6 CO 2 R 6 , OR 6 ; O-aryl, SR 6 , SOR 6 , SO3R 6 , SO2R 6 , SO 2 NR 6 R 6 , CO 2 R 6 , C(O)R 6 , CONR 6 R 6 , aryl, C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkynyl and C 1 -C 4 -haloalkyl;
  • R 5 is absent or is independently selected from: H, C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, and C 1 -C 4 -haloalkyl;
  • R 6 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H , C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, and C 1 -C 4 -haloalkyl;
  • R 7 is a monocyclic aromatic or heteroaromatic ring or R 7 is a bicyclic carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system in which at least one of the two rings is aromatic or heteroaromatic;
  • R 8 is independently selected from: H, C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C 1 -C 4 -haloalkyl, S(O)2-C 1 -C 4 -alkyl and
  • R 9 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, Me, and CF3;
  • R 10 is independently at each occurrence selected from: R 9 , OR 6 , CO 2 R 6 and NR 6 R 11 ; wherein each of the aforementioned alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, carbocyclic, heterocycloalkyl, aryl (e.g.
  • linker group L 1 is arranged such that L 2 is attached to the end of linker group L 1 which is defined as (CR 9 R 10 )t.
  • linker group L 1 which is defined as (CR 9 R 9 ) r is attached to the rest of the molecule at the point of contact of the group R 2 .
  • the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (II):
  • R 3 , R 7 , A, X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , Y 1 , Y 2 , L 1 , L 2 and L 3 are as defined above for formula (I).
  • the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (III):
  • R 7 , A, X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , Y 1 , Y 2 , L 1 , L 2 and L 3 are as defined above for formula (I) and wherein X 4 is N or CR 4 , R 4 being as defined above for formula (I).
  • the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (IV):
  • the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (V):
  • R 4 , R 7 , X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , L 1 , L 2 and L 3 are as defined above for formula (I) and wherein X 4 is N or CR 4 .
  • the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (VI):
  • R 4 , R 7 , L 1 , L 2 and L 3 are as defined above for formula (I).
  • the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula
  • the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (VIII):
  • R 1 , R 4 , A, X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , and X 4 are as defined above for formula (I).
  • the compound of formula (I) has a structure according to any more of formulae (IX) to (XXXXVII):
  • R 1 , R 4 , R 5 , A, X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 and W are as defined above for formula (I) and wherein R 5 is independently selected from: H, C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, and C 1 -C 4 -haloalkyl.
  • the compound may thus be a compound of formula (XXIV).
  • the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (XXXXXVIII):
  • R 4 , R 7 , X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , L 1 , L 2 and L 3 are as defined above for formula (I) and wherein X 4 is N or CR 4 .
  • the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (XXXXXIX):
  • R 4a is selected from H, F, NR 6 R 11 , OR 6 , O-aryl and SR 6 ;
  • W 1 is N or CR 13 ;
  • R 12 is independently at each occurrence selected from: halo, nitro, cyano, NR a R a , NR a S(O)2R a , NR a CONR a R a , NR a C(O)R a , NR a CO 2 R a , OR a ;
  • SR a S(O)R a , S(O) 2 OR a , S(O) 2 R a , S(O) 2 NR a R a , CO 2 R a C(O)R a , CONR a R a , C 1 -C 4 -
  • the compound of formula (I) is selected from a compound of formula (XXXXX) and a compound of formula (XXXXXI):
  • X 4 is selected from N, NR 3 , CR 2 and CR 4 . It may be that X 4 is selected from N, NR 3 and CR 4
  • bond between X 3 and X 4 is a double bond;
  • X 1 , X 2 and X 3 are each independently selected from: N and CR 4 ; and X 4 is selected from N, CR 2 and CR 4 .
  • R 1 is R 3 and X 4 is CR 2 .
  • R 1 may be H or C 1 -C 4 -alkyl.
  • R 1 is R 2 and X 4 is selected from N or CR 4 .
  • X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 are N. It may be that a single one of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 is N. It may be that X 1 is N .
  • X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 is CR 4a wherein R 4a is selected from H, CN, halo, NR 6 R 11 , OR 6 , O-aryl, SR 6 , e.g. selected from halo, CN, NR 6 R 11 , OR 6 ; O-aryl, SR 6 . It may be that R 4a is selected from H, CN, F and OR 6 . It may be that a single one of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 is CR 4a . It may be that R 4a is OR 6 . In some preferred embodiments, R 4a is O-C1-C4- alkyl, e.g. OMe. In other preferred embodiments, R 4a is halo, e.g. F.
  • X 1 , X 2 and X 4 are each CH.
  • X 3 is CR 4a , wherein R 4a is selected from H, halo, CN, NR 6 R 11 , OR 6 , O-aryl and SR 6 .
  • R 4a may be selected from: F, CN, NR 6 R 11 , OR 6 ; O-aryl and SR 6 .
  • R 4a may be selected from: NR 6 R 11 , OR 6 ; O-aryl and SR 6 . It may be that R 4a is selected from H, F, CN and OR 6 .
  • R 4a may be selected from F, CN and OR 6 , e.g. from F and OR 6 . It may be that R 4a is OR 6 .
  • R 4a is 0-C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, e.g. OMe. In other preferred embodiments, R 4a is halo, e.g. F. Alternatively, X 3 may be CH.
  • R 3 is selected from H and C 1 -C 4 -alkyl. Thus, R 3 may be selected from H and methyl.
  • U 1 is CO
  • U 2 is preferably independently selected from: a bond, O, S and NR 11 , e.g. U 2 is independently selected from NR 11 or O.
  • U 1 is preferably independently selected from: a bond, O, S and NR 11 , e.g. U 1 is independently selected from NR 11 or O.
  • U 1 and U 2 are CO and the other is O.
  • Such compounds may find particular use in the treatment of mastitis in domestic animals, e.g. by direct application (either topical or by injection) to the udder of a subject.
  • L 1 is an alkylene chain of the form -(CR 9 R 9 ) r (CR 9 R 10 ) r .
  • L 2 is a heterocycloalkyl ring having a nitrogen atom in the ring, and where L 1 is attached to L 2 through that nitrogen atom, it is preferable that t is absent, e.g. it is preferable that L 1 is a linker group of the form -(CR 9 R 9 ) r U 1 -U 2 -(CR 9 R 9 ) s - wherein s is an integer selected from 1 , 2 and 3.
  • L 1 may be a linker group of the form -(CR 9 R 9 ) S -.
  • R 1 is R 2
  • r is preferably an integer selected from 1 , 2 or 3.
  • t is 1 and R 10 is OR 6 (e.g. OH). It may be that t is 2 and R 10 is at each occurrence OR 6 (e.g. OH). It may be that t is 1 and R 10 is NR 6 R 11 , (e.g. NH 2 ).
  • R 9 is at each occurrence H.
  • the total length of the -L 1 - linker group (i.e. the number of atoms in a continuous chain between L 2 and the point of contact of R 2 to the rest of the molecule) is 2 or 3 atoms, e.g. the total length of the linker group is 2 atoms.
  • L 1 examples include -CH 2 CH 2 -, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 , -CH 2 CH(NH 2 )-, -CH(OH)CH(OH)-, CH 2 CH(OH) and -CH(OH)CH 2 CH 2 -.
  • L 1 may also be -CO 2 CH 2 -.
  • L 2 may be a saturated 5-, 6- or 7- membered monocyclic cycloalkyl or heterocycloakyl ring.
  • L 2 is preferably a saturated 6-membered monocyclic cycloalkyl or heterocycloakyl ring.
  • the groups L 1 and N(R 7 )L 3 R 8 are preferably attached to L 2 para to each other, i.e. the 6- membered monocyclic cycloalkyl or heterocycloakyl ring is 1 , 4-substituted with respect to the groups L 1 and N(R 7 )L 3 R 8 .
  • L 2 may therefore be a cyclohexyl ring.
  • L 2 may also be a tetrahydropyran ring.
  • L 2 may also be a piperidine ring. Where L 2 is a piperidine ring, it may be linked to L 1 through the nitrogen in the piperidine ring. If this is not the case, the nitrogen in the piperidine ring will take the form NR 11 group. Thus, L 2 may take the form:
  • W 1 is N or CR 13 ;
  • W 1 is N. If this is the case it is preferable that L 1 is a linker group of the form - (CR 9 R 9 ) ⁇ U 1 -U 2 -(CR 9 R 9 )s- wherein s is an integer selected from 1 , 2 and 3.
  • W 1 is CR 13 .
  • R 13 is H.
  • L 2 groups include:
  • L 2 is a saturated 7-, 8- or 9- membered bicyclic cycloalkyl or heterocyclic ring.
  • L 2 and R 8 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached together form a saturated 5-, 6- or 7- membered monocyclic heterocycloalkyl ring, e.g. a piperidine ring. If so, L 1 is preferably attached to the piperidine ring at the 4-position relative to the piperidine nitrogen.
  • the group -L 2 NR 8 - may take the form:
  • L 3 may be absent.
  • R 2 may be
  • L 3 may be -N(R 8 )L 4 -.
  • R 2 may be
  • L 4 is preferably -CR 9 R 9 - and most preferably is -CH 2 -.
  • L 4 may be a 3-, 4- or 5- membered cycloalkyl ring, e.g. a 4-membered cycloalkyl ring.
  • Y 1 and Y 2 are both C.
  • Y 1 and Y 2 are not both N.
  • Z 1 and Z 3 may each be independently selected from O, S, S(O), NR 5 and CR 4 ;
  • the compound may be a compound of one or more of formulae (XIV), (XV), (XVI), (XVII), (XVIII) or (XXXXXVII), e.g. a compound of formula (XIV), (XV), (XVI), (XVII), (XVIII) or (XXXXXVII) in which W is O.
  • Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 are each independently selected from O, S, NR 5 and CR 4 .
  • Y 1 and Y 2 are each independently selected from C and N;
  • Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 are each independently selected from O, S, NR 5 and CR 4 ; with the proviso that the ring formed by Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , Y 1 and Y 2 contains two endocyclic double bonds; and with the further proviso that at least one of Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , Y 1 and Y 2 is O, S, N or NR 5 .
  • Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , Y 1 and Y 2 together form an imidazole, triazole, tetrazole, pyrazole or pyrrole ring. It may be that one of Y 1 and Y 2 is N and the other is C. Thus, it may be that Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , Y 1 and Y 2 together form an imidazole, triazole, tetrazole, pyrazole or pyrrole ring in which a single one of Y 1 and Y 2 is N. It may be that Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , Y 1 and Y 2 together form an triazole or tetrazole.
  • Y 1 and Y 2 may be N and the other is C.
  • Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , Y 1 and Y 2 together form a triazole or tetrazole ring in which a single one of Y 1 and Y 2 is N. It may be that Y 1 is N. It may be that Y 2 is N .
  • Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , Y 1 and Y 2 together form a thiophene, furan, or pyrrole ring.
  • a single one of Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 is independently selected from O, S and NR 5 and the remaining two of Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 are each CR 4 .
  • Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , Y 1 and Y 2 together form a pyrazole, oxazole, imidazole, thiazole, isoxazole or isothiazole ring.
  • a single one of Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 is independently CR 4 and the remaining two of Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 are selected from O, S and NR 5 .
  • Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , Y 1 and Y 2 together form a oxazole, thiazole, isoxazole, furan, thiophene or isothiazole ring.
  • Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , Y 1 and Y 2 together form a oxazole, thiazole, isoxazole or isothiazole ring.
  • the remaining Z 1 , Z 2 or Z 3 is selected from O and S.
  • Z 1 , Z- or Z- is O.
  • Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , Y 1 and Y 2 together form a oxazole or isoxazole ring.
  • a single one of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 is N, e.g. it may be that X 1 is N.
  • the remainder of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 (e.g. X 2 , X 3 and X 4 ) may be CR 4 .
  • Y 1 and Y 2 are each C; Z 1 is CR 4 (e.g. CH); Z 2 is selected from O, S and N R 5 ; and Z 3 is N.
  • Z 1 is CR 4 (e.g. CH); Z 2 is selected from O, S and N R 5 ; and Z 3 is N.
  • Z 2 is selected from O and S.
  • Z 2 is O.
  • a single one of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 is N, e.g. it may be that X 1 is N.
  • the remainder of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 may be CR 4 .
  • R 3 is selected from H and C 1 -C 4 -alkyl.
  • R 3 may be selected from H and methyl.
  • R 4 may be independently at each occurrence selected from: H, halo, nitro, cyano, SOR 6 , SO 3 R 6 , SO2R 6 , SO 2 NR 6 R 6 CO 2 R 6 C(O)R 6 , CONR 6 R 6 , C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkynyl, C 2 -C 4 - alkenyl and C 1 -C 4 -haloalkyl.
  • R 4 may be independently at each occurrence selected from: halo, nitro, cyano, SOR 6 , SO3R 6 , SO2R 6 , SO 2 NR 6 R 6 CO 2 R 6 C(O)R 6 , CONR 6 R 6 , C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkynyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkenyl and C 1 -C 4 -haloalkyl.
  • R 4 may be independently at each occurrence selected from: H, halo, nitro, C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkynyl, C1-C4- haloalkyl.
  • R 4 may be independently at each occurrence selected from: halo, nitro, C1-C4- alkyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 -haloalkyl.
  • R 4 may be independently at each occurrence selected from: H, C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 -haloalkyl.
  • R 4 may at all occurrences be H.
  • R 4 group which forms part of Z 1 , Z 2 or Z 3 is an R 4b group, wherein R 4b is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, halo, nitro, cyano, C2-alkynyl, CO 2 H, C(O)H, and CONH 2 .
  • R 4b may be at each occurrence independently selected from: H, halo, nitro, cyano, C 2 -alkynyl.
  • R 4b may be at each occurrence independently selected from: H and halo.
  • R 4b may at all occurrences be H.
  • R 5 is attached to a nitrogen which forms a double bond to a neighbouring atom in the ring formed by Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , Y 1 and Y 2 , R 5 is absent. Where R 5 is attached to a nitrogen which forms only single bonds to the neighbouring atoms in the ring formed by Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , Y 1 and Y 2 , R 5 is not absent.
  • R 5 may be H.
  • R 5 may be C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, e.g. methyl.
  • R 6 is H. It may be that at all occurrences R 6 is H.
  • R 7 may be a monocyclic aryl group.
  • R 7 may be a phenyl group.
  • Said phenyl group may be unsubstituted or it may be substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents which are each independently at each occurrence selected from the group consisting of: halo, nitro, cyano, NR a R a , NR a S(O) 2 R a , NR a CONR a R a , NR a CO 2 R a , NR a C(O)R a , OR a ; SR a , SOR a , SO 3 R a , SO 2 R a , SO 2 NR a R a , CO 2 R a C(O)R a , CONR a R a , C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkynyl, C 1 -
  • R 7 may be a phenyl group which is substituted by 1 to 3 substituents independently at each occurrence selected from F, nitro, C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C 2 -C 4 - alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkynyl and C 1 -C 4 -haloalkyl.
  • R 7 groups include 2,5-difluorophen-1-yl and 3-nitro-4-methylphen-1-yl.
  • R 7 is a bicyclic carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system in which at least one of the two rings is aromatic or heteroaromatic.
  • R 7 may take the form:
  • V 1 , V 2 and V 3 are each independently selected from: N and CR 4 ; with the proviso that no more than two of V 1 , V 2 and V 3 are N; and wherein the ring B is a substituted or unsubstituted 5- or 6- membered saturated cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl ring.
  • R 7 takes the form:
  • V 4 and V 5 are each independently selected from O, S and NR a ;
  • V 1 , V 2 , V 3 , V 4 , V 5 , R 14 and m are selected such that the number of substituent groups off the R 7 bicycle does not exceed 5.
  • V 1 , V 2 and V 3 are each independently selected from: N and CH; with the proviso that no more than two of V 1 , V 2 and V 3 are N. It may be that a single one of V 1 , V 2 and V 3 is N.
  • V 3 is CR 4 (e.g. CH).
  • V 1 is N and V 2 is CR 4 (e.g. CH).
  • V 2 is N and V 1 is CR 4 (e.g. CH).
  • V 1 and V 2 are each N.
  • V 4 is O.
  • both V 4 and V 5 are O.
  • V 4 is O and V 5 is S.
  • V 4 is O and V 5 is NR a (e.g. NH).
  • V 4 can also be S. Thus, it may be that V 4 is S and V 5 is NR a (e.g. NH).
  • V 5 is NR a (e.g. NH).
  • NR a e.g. NH
  • m may be 1.
  • m is 2.
  • V 4 is O, V 5 is O, m is 2 and R 14 is in all instances H.
  • V 4 is O, V 5 is S, m is 2 and R 14 is in all instances H.
  • R 7 may also take the form , wherein V 6 is independently selected from N and CR 4 (e.g. CH); V 7 is independently selected from NR a , S and O; and R 15 is independently at each occurrence selected from: halo, nitro, cyano, NR a R a , NR a S(O) 2 R a , NR a C(O)R a , NR a CONR a R a , NR a CO 2 R a , NR a C(O)R a , OR a ; SR a , SOR a , SO 3 R a , SO 2 R a , SO 2 NR a R a , CO 2 R a C(O)R a , CONR a R a , C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 -hal
  • R 15 may be independently at each occurrence selected from F, CN, OR a , nitro, C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C2- C4-alkenyl, C ⁇ C ⁇ -alkynyl and C 1 -C 4 -haloalkyl.
  • This form of R 7 is particularly preferred where L 3 is absent.
  • V 6 , V 7 , and R 15 are selected such that the number of substituent groups off the R 7 bicycle does not exceed 5.
  • An exemplary R 7 group is
  • R 8 is selected from H or C 1 -C 4 -alkyl. Even more preferably, R 8 is H. Preferably, R 9 is at all occurrences H.
  • R 10 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, OR 6 , CO 2 R 6 and NR 6 R 11 . It may be that R 10 is independently selected from OR 6 and NR 6 R 11 . Preferably, R 10 is independently selected from OH and NH 2 .
  • R 11 is selected from H and C 1 -C 4 -alkyl.
  • R 11 is at each occurrence selected from H and C 1 -C 4 -alkyl.
  • R 11 may be H.
  • R 11 may be C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, e.g. methyl. It may be that at all occurrences, R 11 is H.
  • W is preferably O.
  • the compound may be any one or more compound(s) selected from those tested in
  • the compound may be any one or more compound(s) selected from:
  • Example 8 5- ⁇ 2-[4-( ⁇ 2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl ⁇ amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl ⁇ - 4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one H;
  • the compound of the invention is an N-oxide
  • it will typically be a pyridine N-oxide, i.e. where the compound of the invention comprises a pyridine ring (which may form part of a bicyclic or tricyclic ring system), the nitrogen of that pyridine may be N + -0 " .
  • the compound of the invention is not an N-oxide.
  • the compound may be a compound of formula (la), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
  • R 1 is selected from R 2 or R 3 ;
  • R 2 represents the group: are each independently selected from: N and CR 4 ;
  • X 4 is selected from N, CR 2 and CR 4 ; wherein only one of R 1 and X 4 contains the group R 2 ; and wherein no more than two of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 are N;
  • Y 1 and Y 2 are each independently selected from C and N;
  • the compound may be a compound of formula (lb), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or N-oxide thereof:
  • tautomeric isomerism ('tautomerism') can occur.
  • This can take the form of proton tautomerism in compounds of the invention containing, for example, an imino, keto, or oxime group, or so- called valence tautomerism in compounds which contain an aromatic moiety.
  • the racemate (or a racemic precursor) may be reacted with a suitable optically active compound, for example, an alcohol, or, in the case where the compound of the invention contains an acidic or basic moiety, a base or acid such as 1-phenylethylamine or tartaric acid.
  • a suitable optically active compound for example, an alcohol, or, in the case where the compound of the invention contains an acidic or basic moiety, a base or acid such as 1-phenylethylamine or tartaric acid.
  • the resulting diastereomeric mixture may be separated by chromatography and/or fractional crystallization and one or both of the diastereoisomers converted into the corresponding pure enantiomer(s) by means well known to a skilled person.
  • Chiral compounds of the invention may be obtained in enantiomerically-enriched form using chromatography, typically HPLC, on an asymmetric resin with a mobile phase consisting of a hydrocarbon, typically heptane or hexane, containing from 0 to 50% by volume of isopropanol, typically from 2% to 20%, and from 0 to 5% by volume of an alkylamine, typically 0.1 % diethylamine. Concentration of the eluate affords the enriched mixture.
  • chromatography typically HPLC
  • a mobile phase consisting of a hydrocarbon, typically heptane or hexane, containing from 0 to 50% by volume of isopropanol, typically from 2% to 20%, and from 0 to 5% by volume of an alkylamine, typically 0.1 % diethylamine.
  • racemic compounds such as the racemic compound (true racemate) referred to above wherein one homogeneous form of crystal is produced containing both enantiomers in equimolar amounts.
  • the second type is the racemic mixture or conglomerate wherein two forms of crystal are produced in equimolar amounts each comprising a single enantiomer. While both of the crystal forms present in a racemic mixture have identical physical properties, they may have different physical properties compared to the true racemate. Racemic mixtures may be separated by conventional techniques known to those skilled in the art - see, for example, "Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds" by E. L. Eliel and S. H. Wilen (Wiley, 1994).
  • C m -C n refers to a group with m to n carbon atoms.
  • alkyl refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbon chain.
  • C 1 -C 6 -alkyl may refer to methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, / ' so-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl and n- hexyl.
  • the alkyl groups may be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents. Specific substituents for each alkyl group independently may be fluorine, OR a or NHR a .
  • haloalkyl refers to a hydrocarbon chain substituted with at least one halogen atom independently chosen at each occurrence from: fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine.
  • the halogen atom may be present at any position on the hydrocarbon chain.
  • C 1 -C 6 -haloalkyl may refer to chloromethyl, fluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, chloroethyl e.g. 1- chloromethyl and 2-chloroethyl, trichloroethyl e.g. 1 ,2,2-trichloroethyl, 2,2,2-trichloroethyl, fluoroethyl e.g.
  • a halo alkyl group may be a fluoroalkyl group, i.e. a hydrocarbon chain substituted with at least one halogen atom.
  • alkenyl refers to a branched or linear hydrocarbon chain containing at least one double bond.
  • the double bond(s) may be present as the E or Z isomer.
  • the double bond may be at any possible position of the hydrocarbon chain.
  • C2-C6-alkenyl may refer to ethenyl, propenyl, butenyl, butadienyl, pentenyl, pentadienyl, hexenyl and hexadienyl.
  • the alkenyl groups may be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents. Specific substituents for any saturated carbon atom in each alkenyl group independently may be fluorine, OR a or NHR a .
  • alkynyl refers to a branched or linear hydrocarbon chain containing at least one triple bond.
  • the triple bond may be at any possible position of the hydrocarbon chain.
  • C2-C6-alkynyl may refer to ethynyl, propynyl, butynyl, pentynyl and hexynyl.
  • the alkynyl groups may be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents. Specific substituents for any saturated carbon atom in each alkynyl group independently may be fluorine, OR a or NHR a .
  • cycloalkyl refers to a saturated hydrocarbon ring system containing 3, 4, 5 or 6 carbon atoms.
  • C 3 -C 6 -cycloalkyl may refer to cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl.
  • the cycloalkyl groups may be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents. Specific substituents for each cycloalkyl group independently may be fluorine, OR a or NHR a .
  • aromatic when applied to a substituent as a whole means a single ring or polycyclic ring system with 4n + 2 electrons in a conjugated ⁇ system within the ring or ring system where all atoms contributing to the conjugated ⁇ system are in the same plane.
  • heteromatic when applied to a substituent as a whole means a single ring or polycyclic ring system with 4n + 2 electrons in a conjugated ⁇ system within the ring or ring system where all atoms contributing to the conjugated ⁇ system are in the same plane, the ring system comprising from 1 to 4 heteroatoms independently selected from O, S and N (in other words from 1 to 4 of the atoms forming the ring or ring system are selected from O, S and N).
  • aryl refers to an aromatic hydrocarbon ring system.
  • the ring system has 4n +2 electrons in a conjugated ⁇ system within a ring where all atoms contributing to the conjugated ⁇ system are in the same plane.
  • the "aryl” may be phenyl and naphthyl.
  • the aryl group may be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents. Specific substituents for each aryl group independently may be C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C 1 -C 4 -haloalkyl, cyano, halogen, OR a or NHR a .
  • Aryl groups may have from 6 to 20 carbon atoms as appropriate to satisfy valency requirements.
  • Aryl groups comprise aromatic rings, i.e. rings which satisfy the Huckel rule.
  • Aryl groups may be optionally substituted phenyl groups, optionally substituted biphenyl groups, optionally substituted naphthalenyl groups or optionally substituted anthracenyl groups.
  • aryl groups may include non-aromatic carbocyclic portions.
  • An aromatic ring is a phenyl ring.
  • heteroaryl may refer to any aromatic (i.e. a ring system containing (4n + 2) ⁇ - electrons or n- electrons in the ⁇ -system) 5-10 membered ring system comprising from 1 to 4 heteroatoms independently selected from O, S and N (in other words from 1 to 4 of the atoms forming the ring system are selected from O, S and N).
  • any heteroaryl groups may be independently selected from: 5 membered heteroaryl groups in which the heteroaromatic ring is substituted with 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from O, S and N; and 6-membered heteroaryl groups in which the heteroaromatic ring is substituted with 1-3 (e.g.1-2) nitrogen atoms; 9-membered bicyclic heteroaryl groups in which the heteroaromatic system is substituted with 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from O, S and N; 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl groups in which the heteroaromatic system is substituted with 1-4 nitrogen atoms.
  • heteroaryl groups may be independently selected from: pyrrole, furan, thiophene, pyrazole, imidazole, oxazole, isoxazole, triazole, oxadiazole, thiadiazole, tetrazole; pyridine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, triazine, indole, isoindole, benzofuran, isobenzofuran, benzothiophene, indazole, benzimidazole, benzoxazole, benzthiazole, benzisoxazole, purine, quinoline, isoquinoline, cinnoline, quinazoline, quinoxaline, pteridine, phthalazine, naphthyridine.
  • Heteroaryl groups may also be 6-membered heteroaryl groups in which the heteroaromatic ring is substituted with 1 heteroatomic group independently selected from O, S and NH and the ring also comprises a carbonyl group. Such groups include pyridones and pyranones.
  • the heteroaryl system itself may be substituted with other groups.
  • the heteroaryl group may be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents. Specific substituents for each heteroaryl group independently may be C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C 1 -C 4 -haloalkyl, cyano, halogen, OR a or NHR a .
  • Heteroaryl groups may mean a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl group. They may therefore comprise a 5- or 6- membered heteroaromatic ring, i.e. a 5- or 6- membered ring which satisfies the Huckel rule and comprises a heteroatom. Heteroaryl groups may be selected from: 5-membered heteroaryl groups in which the heteroaromatic ring is includes 1-4 heteroatoms selected from O, S and N; and 6-membered heteroaryl groups in which the heteroaromatic ring includes 1-2 nitrogen atoms.
  • heteroaryl groups and heteroaromatic rings may be selected from: pyrrole, furan, thiophene, pyrazole, imidazole, oxazole, isoxazole, triazole, oxadiazole, thiodiazole, pyridine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, pyrazine.
  • y-membered heterocycloalkyl may refer to a y-membered monocyclic or bicyclic saturated or partially saturated groups comprising 1 or 2 heteroatoms independently selected from O, S and N in the ring system (in other words 1 or 2 of the atoms forming the ring system are selected from O, S and N).
  • partially saturated it is meant that the ring may comprise one or two double bonds. This applies particularly to monocyclic rings with from 5 to 8 members. The double bond will typically be between two carbon atoms but may be between a carbon atom and a nitrogen atom.
  • heterocycloalkyl groups include; piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, pyrrolidine, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, dihydrofuran, tetrahydropyran, dihydropyran, dioxane, azepine.
  • Bicyclic systems may be spiro-fused, i.e. where the rings are linked to each other through a single carbon atom; vicinally fused, i.e. where the rings are linked to each other through two adjacent carbon or nitrogen atoms; or they may be share a bridgehead, i.e.
  • heterocycloalkyl groups may be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents.
  • Specific substituents for any saturated carbon atom in each heterocycloalkyl group may independently be fluorine, OR a or N H R a .
  • An 'endocyclic' double bond is one where both of the atoms between which the double bond is formed are in the ring or ring system in which the atoms are situated.
  • a carbocyclic group consists of one or more rings which are entirely formed from carbon atoms.
  • a carbocylic group can be a mono- or bicyclic cycloalkyl group, or it can comprise at least one phenyl ring.
  • a heterocyclic group consists of one or more rings wherein the ring system includes at least one heteroatom.
  • a heterocyclic group comprises at least one heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl rings.
  • a heterocycloalkyl ring may be a saturated ring comprising at least one heteroatom selected from O, S and N .
  • a ring system is described as being a x-membered bicyclic group, that is intended to mean that the skeleton of the bicyclic ring system is formed from x atoms (i.e. the total number of atoms across the two rings of the bicycle is x).
  • Aryl and heteroaryl groups are optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents which are each independently at each occurrence selected from the group consisting of: halo, nitro, cyano, N R a R a , N R a S(O) 2 R a , NR a CON R a R a , NR a CO 2 R a , NR a C(O)R a , OR a ; SR a , SOR a , SO 3 R a , SO 2 R a , SO 2 NR a R a , CO 2 R a C(O)R a , CON R a R a , C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 -alkynyl, C 1 - C4-haloalkyl and CR a R a N R a R a ; wherein R a is independently at each occurrence selected from H
  • the present invention also includes the synthesis of all pharmaceutically acceptable isotopically-labelled compounds of formulae (I) to (XXXXXI) wherein one or more atoms are replaced by atoms having the same atomic number, but an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number most commonly found in nature.
  • isotopes suitable for inclusion in the compounds of the invention include isotopes of hydrogen, such as 2 H and 3 H , carbon, such as 1 1 C, 13 C and 14 C, chlorine, such as 36 CI, fluorine, such as 18 F, iodine, such as 123 l and 125 l, nitrogen, such as 13 N and 15 N, oxygen, such as 15 O, 17 O and 18 O, phosphorus, such as 32 P, and sulphur, such as 35 S.
  • Radioactive isotopes tritium, i.e. 3 H, and carbon-14, i.e. 14 C, are particularly useful for this purpose in view of their ease of incorporation and ready means of detection.
  • substitution with heavier isotopes such as deuterium, i.e. 2 H, may afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example, increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements, and hence may be preferred in some circumstances.
  • Isotopically-labelled compounds can generally be prepared by conventional techniques known to those skilled in the art or by processes analogous to those described using an appropriate isotopically-labelled reagent in place of the non-labelled reagent previously employed.
  • each of the compounds of the present invention may be used as a medicament.
  • compound as defined above for the treatment of bacterial infections there is provided compound as defined above for the treatment of bacterial infections.
  • the compounds and formulations of the present invention may be used in the treatment of a wide range of bacterial infections.
  • the compounds can be used to treat bacterial infections caused by one or more resistant strains of bacteria e.g a strain which is resistant to at least one approved antibiotic drug.
  • the compounds can be used to treat bacterial infections caused by one or more resistant strains of Gram-positive bacteria e.g a strain which is resistant to at least one approved antibiotic drug.
  • the compounds can be used to treat bacterial infections caused by one or more resistant strains of Gram-negative bacteria, e.g a strain which is resistant to at least one approved antibiotic drug.
  • the compounds and formulations of the invention may be used to treat infections caused by bacteria which are in the form of a biofilm.
  • resistant strains is intended to mean strains of bacteria which have shown resistance to one or more known antibacterial drug. For example, it may refer to strains which are resistant to methicillin, strains that are resistant to one or more other ⁇ -lactam antibiotics, strains that are resistant to one or more fluoroquinolones and/or strains that are resistant to one or more other antibiotics (i.e. antibiotics other than ⁇ -lactams and fluoroquinolones).
  • a resistant strain is one in which the MIC of a given compound or class of compounds for that strain has shifted to a significantly higher number than for the parent (susceptible) strain.
  • the bacterial strain may be resistant to one or more fluoroquinolone antibiotics, e.g. one or more antibiotics selected from levofloxacin, enoxacin, fleroxacin, lomefloxacin, nadifloxacin, norfloxacin, rufloxacin, balofloxacin, grepafloxacin, pazufloxacin, sparfloxacin, temafloxacin, tosufloxacin, besifloxacin, clinafloxacin, garenoxacin, gemifloxacin, gatifloxacin, sitafloxacin, trovafloxacin, prulifloxacin, ciprofloxacin, pefloxacin, moxifloxacin, ofloxacin, delafloxacin, zabofloxacin, avarofloxacin, finafloxacin.
  • fluoroquinolone antibiotics e.g. one or more antibiotics selected from
  • the compounds of the invention may be particularly effective at treating infections caused by Gram-positive bacteria.
  • the compounds of the invention may be particularly effective at treating infections caused by Gram-positive bacteria which are resistant to one or more fluoroquinolone antibiotics.
  • the compounds of the invention may be particularly effective at treating infections caused by Gram negative bacteria.
  • the compounds of the invention may be particularly effective at treating infections caused by Gram-negative bacteria which are resistant to one or more fluoroquinolone antibiotics.
  • the compounds of the invention may be particularly effective at treating infections caused by aerobic bacteria, e.g. S. Aureus.
  • the compounds of the invention may be particularly effective at treating infections caused by anaerobic bacteria, e.g. a Clostridium spp such as Clostridium difficile.
  • the compounds and formulations of the present invention can be used to treat or to prevent infections caused by bacterial strains associated with biowarfare. These may be strains which are category A pathogens as identified by the US government (e.g. those which cause anthrax, plague etc.) and/or they may be strains which are category B pathogens as identified by the US government (e.g. those which cause Glanders disease, mellioidosis etc).
  • the compounds and formulations of the present invention can be used to treat or to prevent infections caused by Gram-positive bacterial strains associated with biowarfare (e.g. anthrax). More particularly, the compounds and formulations may be used to treat category A and/or category B pathogens as defined by the US government on 1 st Jan 2014.
  • the bacterial infection may be caused by a strain selected from: Neisseria spp., Haemophilus spp., Legionella spp., Pasteurella spp., Bordetella spp., Brucella spp., Francisella spp. and Moraxella spp.
  • a strain selected from: Neisseria spp., Haemophilus spp., Legionella spp., Pasteurella spp., Bordetella spp., Brucella spp., Francisella spp. and Moraxella spp.
  • a fastidious bacterium is one having a complex nutritional requirement, i.e.
  • Neisseria gonorrhoeae requires, amongst other supplements, iron, several amino acids, cofactors and vitamins in order to grow.
  • Members of the fastidious Gram-negative bacteria group often share common antibiotic susceptibility profiles.
  • Pathogenic Neisseria species include Neisseria gonorrhoeae (the pathogen responsible for gonorrhoea) and Neisseria meningitidis (one of the pathogens responsible for bacterial meningitis). Infections which can be treated by the compounds and methods of the invention include gonorrhoea.
  • Infections which can be treated include secondary infections which can arise from lack of treatment of a primary Neisseria gonorrhoeae infection.
  • Exemplary secondary infections include urethritis, dysuria, epididymitis, pelvic inflammatory disease, cervicitis and endometritis and also systemic gonococcal infections (e.g. those manifesting as arthritis, endocarditis or meningitis).
  • the gonorrhoea infection may be one caused by a strain of Neisseria gonorrhoeae which is resistant to at least one known antibacterial drug, e.g. at least one ⁇ -lactam drug.
  • the gonorrhoea infection may be one caused by a strain of Neisseria gonorrhoeae which is resistant to at least one approved drug.
  • the at least one drug may be an antibiotic drug, e.g. one that is approved for use in treating one of the fastidious Gram negative species mentioned in this specification. It may be approved for use in treating gonorrhoea.
  • the approved drug may be a ⁇ -lactam drug.
  • Further infections which can be treated by the compounds and methods of the invention include bacterial meningitis and Neisseria meningitidis infections of other parts of the human or animal body.
  • the compounds of the invention can be used to treat or prevent mycobacterial infections, e.g. mycobacterial infections caused by resistant strains of mycobacteria.
  • mycobacterial infections e.g. mycobacterial infections caused by resistant strains of mycobacteria.
  • they can be used to treat TB or leprosy.
  • the mycobacterial infection is caused by M. tuberculosis.
  • the mycobacterial infection is caused by a mycobacterium selected from: M. avium complex, M. abscessus, M. leprae, M. bovis, M. kansasii, M. chelonae, M. africanum, M. canetti and M. microti.
  • the compounds may be used to treat resistant strains of TB, e.g. MDR-TB (i.e.
  • TB infections caused by strains which are resistant to isoniazid and rifampicin TB infections caused by strains which are resistant to isoniazid and rifampicin
  • XDR-TB i.e. TB infections caused by strains which are resistant to isoniazid, rifampicin, at least one fluoroquinolone and at least one of kanamycin, capreomycin and amikacin
  • TDR-TB i.e. TB infections caused by strains which have proved resistant to every drug tested against it with the exception of a compound of the invention.
  • the mycobacterium is caused by a mycobacterial strain which is resistant to at least one approved antimycobacterial compound.
  • the at least one approved antimycobacterial compound may be selected from: rifampicin, isoniazid, kanamycin, capreomycin, amikacin and a fluoroquinolone.
  • the at least one approved antimycobacterial compound may be selected from: rifampicin, moxifloxacin, isoniazid, ciprofloxacin and levofloxacin.
  • the compounds of the invention may be used to treat non- replicating TB.
  • the compounds of the invention may also be useful in treating other forms of infectious disease, e.g. fungal infections, parasitic infections and/or viral infections.
  • the compounds of the present invention can be used in the treatment of the human body. They may be used in the treatment of the animal body. In particular, the compounds of the present invention can be used to treat commercial animals such as livestock. Alternatively, the compounds of the present invention can be used to treat companion animals such as cats, dogs, etc.
  • Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, salts of pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic acids such as hydrochloric, sulphuric, phosphoric, nitric, carbonic, boric, sulfamic, and hydrobromic acids, or salts of pharmaceutically acceptable organic acids such as acetic, propionic, butyric, tartaric, maleic, hydroxymaleic, fumaric, malic, citric, lactic, mucic, gluconic, benzoic, succinic, oxalic, phenylacetic, methanesulphonic, toluenesulphonic, benzenesulphonic, salicylic, sulphanilic, aspartic, glutamic, edetic, stearic, palmitic, oleic, lauric, pantothenic, tannic, ascorbic and valeric acids.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic acids such as hydrochloric, sulphuric, phosphoric, n
  • Suitable base salts are formed from bases which form non-toxic salts.
  • bases include the aluminium, arginine, benzathine, calcium, choline, diethylamine, diolamine, glycine, lysine, magnesium, meglumine, olamine, potassium, sodium, tromethamine and zinc salts.
  • Hemisalts of acids and bases may also be formed, for example, hemisulfate and hemicalcium salts.
  • acid addition or base salts wherein the counter ion is optically active, for example, d-lactate or l-lysine, or racemic, for example, dl-tartrate or dl-arginine.
  • Compounds of the invention may exist in a single crystal form or in a mixture of crystal forms or they may be amorphous.
  • compounds of the invention intended for pharmaceutical use may be administered as crystalline or amorphous products. They may be obtained, for example, as solid plugs, powders, or films by methods such as precipitation, crystallization, freeze drying, or spray drying, or evaporative drying. Microwave or radio frequency drying may be used for this purpose.
  • the dosage administered will, of course, vary with the compound employed, the mode of administration, the treatment desired and the disorder indicated.
  • the daily dosage of the compound of the invention may be in the range from 0.01 micrograms per kilogram body weight ( ⁇ g/kg) to 100 milligrams per kilogram body weight (mg/kg).
  • a compound of the invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof may be used on their own but will generally be administered in the form of a pharmaceutical composition in which the compounds of the invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, is in association with a pharmaceutically acceptable adjuvant, diluent or carrier.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable adjuvant diluent or carrier.
  • Conventional procedures for the selection and preparation of suitable pharmaceutical formulations are described in, for example, "Pharmaceuticals - The Science of Dosage Form Designs", M. E. Aulton, Churchill Livingstone, 1988.
  • the compounds of the invention may be administered in combination with other active compounds (e.g. antifungal compounds, oncology compounds) and, in particular, with other antibacterial compounds.
  • active compounds e.g. antifungal compounds, oncology compounds
  • the compound of the invention and the other active e.g. the other antibacterial compound
  • the compound of the invention and the other active e.g. the other antibacterial compound
  • Examples of other bacterial compounds which could be administered with the compounds of the invention are penems, carbapenems, fluoroquinolones, ⁇ -lactams, vancomycin, erythromycin or any other known antibiotic drug molecule.
  • the pharmaceutical composition which is used to administer the compounds of the invention will preferably comprise from 0.05 to 99 %w (per cent by weight) compounds of the invention, more preferably from 0.05 to 80 %w compounds of the invention, still more preferably from 0.10 to 70 %w compounds of the invention, and even more preferably from 0.10 to 50 %w compounds of the invention, all percentages by weight being based on total composition.
  • compositions may be administered topically (e.g. to the skin) in the form, e.g., of creams, gels, lotions, solutions, suspensions, or systemically, e.g. by oral administration in the form of tablets, capsules, syrups, powders, suspensions, solutions or granules; or by parenteral administration in the form of a sterile solution, suspension or emulsion for injection (including intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravascular or infusion); or by rectal administration in the form of suppositories; or by inhalation (i.e. in the form of an aerosol or by nebulisation).
  • oral administration in the form of tablets, capsules, syrups, powders, suspensions, solutions or granules
  • parenteral administration in the form of a sterile solution, suspension or emulsion for injection (including intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravascular or infusion); or by rectal administration in the form of suppositories; or
  • a compound with an in vitro MIC of, for example, 16-64 ⁇ g/mL may still provide an effective treatment against certain bacterial infections.
  • the compounds of the invention may be admixed with an adjuvant or a carrier, for example, lactose, saccharose, sorbitol, mannitol; a starch, for example, potato starch, corn starch or amylopectin; a cellulose derivative; a binder, for example, gelatine or polyvinylpyrrolidone; and/or a lubricant, for example, magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, polyethylene glycol, a wax, paraffin, and the like, and then compressed into tablets.
  • an adjuvant or a carrier for example, lactose, saccharose, sorbitol, mannitol
  • a starch for example, potato starch, corn starch or amylopectin
  • a cellulose derivative for example, gelatine or polyvinylpyrrolidone
  • a lubricant for example, magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, polyethylene glycol, a wax
  • the cores may be coated with a concentrated sugar solution which may contain, for example, gum arabic, gelatine, talcum and titanium dioxide.
  • a concentrated sugar solution which may contain, for example, gum arabic, gelatine, talcum and titanium dioxide.
  • the tablet may be coated with a suitable polymer dissolved in a readily volatile organic solvent.
  • the compounds of the invention may be admixed with, for example, a vegetable oil or polyethylene glycol.
  • Hard gelatine capsules may contain granules of the compound using either the above-mentioned excipients for tablets.
  • liquid or semisolid formulations of the compound of the invention may be filled into hard gelatine capsules.
  • Liquid preparations for oral application may be in the form of syrups or suspensions, for example, solutions containing the compound of the invention, the balance being sugar and a mixture of ethanol, water, glycerol and propylene glycol.
  • such liquid preparations may contain colouring agents, flavouring agents, sweetening agents (such as saccharine), preservative agents and/or carboxymethylcellulose as a thickening agent or other excipients known to those skilled in the art.
  • the compounds of the invention may be administered as a sterile aqueous or oily solution.
  • the size of the dose for therapeutic purposes of compounds of the invention will naturally vary according to the nature and severity of the conditions, the age and sex of the animal or patient and the route of administration, according to well known principles of medicine.
  • Dosage levels, dose frequency, and treatment durations of compounds of the invention are expected to differ depending on the formulation and clinical indication, age, and co-morbid medical conditions of the patient.
  • the standard duration of treatment with compounds of the invention is expected to vary between one and seven days for most clinical indications. It may be necessary to extend the duration of treatment beyond seven days in instances of recurrent infections or infections associated with tissues or implanted materials to which there is poor blood supply including bones/joints, respiratory tract, endocardium, and dental tissues.
  • the present invention provides a pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compound of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
  • the formulation may further comprise one or more other antibiotics, e.g. one or more fluoroquinolone antibiotics.
  • fluoroquinolone antibiotics include levofloxacin, enoxacin, fleroxacin, lomefloxacin, nadifloxacin, norfloxacin, rufloxacin, balofloxacin, grepafloxacin, pazufloxacin, sparfloxacin, temafloxacin, tosufloxacin, besifloxacin, clinafloxacin, garenoxacin, gemifloxacin, gatifloxacin, sitafloxacin, trovafloxacin, prulifloxacin, ciprofloxacin, pefloxacin, moxifloxacin, ofloxacin, delafloxacin, zabofloxacin
  • a method of treating a bacterial infection comprising treating a subject in need thereof with a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention.
  • the compounds of the present invention can be used in the treatment of the human body.
  • the compounds of the invention may be for use in treating human bacterial infections such as infections of the genitourinary system, the respiratory tract, the gastrointestinal tract, the ear, the skin, the throat, soft tissue, bone and joints (including infections caused by Staphylococcus aureus).
  • the compounds can be used to treat pneumonia, sinusitis, acute bacterial sinusitis, bronchitis, acute bacterial exacerbation of chronic bronchitis, anthrax, chronic bacterial prostatitis, acute pyelonephritis, pharyngitis, tuberculosis, tonsillitis, Escherichia coli, prophylaxis before dental surgery, cellulitis, acnes, cystitis, infectious diarrhoea, typhoid fever, infections caused by anaerobic bacteria, peritonitis, abdominal infection, bacteraemia, septicaemia, sexually transmitted bacterial infection (e.g.
  • gonorrhoea Chlamydia
  • bacterial vaginosis pelvic inflammatory disease
  • pseudomembranous colitis Helicobacter pylori
  • acute gingivitis Crohn's disease
  • rosacea fungating tumours, impetigo.
  • the compounds of the present invention may also be used in treating other conditions treatable by eliminating or reducing a bacterial infection. In this case they will act in a secondary manner alongside for example a chemotherapeutic agent used in the treatment of cancer.
  • a compound for use in the preparation of a medicament may be for use in the treatment of any of the diseases, infections and indications mentioned in this specification.
  • a compound of the invention for medical use.
  • the compound may be used in the treatment of any of the diseases, infections and indications mentioned in this specification.
  • the compounds of the present invention can be used to treat commercial animals such as livestock.
  • the livestock may be mammal (excluding humans) e.g. cows, pigs, goats, sheep, llamas, alpacas, camels and rabbits.
  • the livestock may be birds (e.g. chickens, turkeys, ducks, geese etc.).
  • the compounds of the present invention can be used to treat companion animals such as cats, dogs, etc.
  • the veterinary use may be to treat wild populations of animals in order to prevent the spread of disease to humans or to commercial animals.
  • the animals may be rats, badgers, deer, foxes, wolves, mice, kangaroos and monkeys and other apes.
  • a compound of the invention for veterinary use.
  • the compound may be used in the treatment of any of the animal diseases and infections and indications mentioned in this specification.
  • the present invention provides a veterinary formulation comprising a compound of the invention and a veterinarily acceptable excipient.
  • the methods by which the compounds may be administered for veterinary use include oral administration by capsule, bolus, tablet or drench, topical administration as an ointment, a pour-on, spot-on, dip, spray, mousse, shampoo, collar or powder formulation or, alternatively, they can be administered by injection (e.g. subcutaneously, intramuscularly or intravenously), or as an implant.
  • Such formulations may be prepared in a conventional manner in accordance with standard veterinary practice.
  • the formulations will vary with regard to the weight of active compound contained therein, depending on the species of animal to be treated, the severity and type of infection and the body weight of the animal.
  • typical dose ranges of the active ingredient are 0.01 to 100 mg per kg of body weight of the animal.
  • the range is 0.1 to 10 mg per kg.
  • the veterinary practitioner, or the skilled person will be able to determine the actual dosage which will be most suitable for an individual patient, which may vary with the species, age, weight and response of the particular patient.
  • the above dosages are exemplary of the average case; there can, of course, be individual instances where higher or lower dosage ranges are merited, and such are within the scope of this invention.
  • the compounds when treating animals the compounds may be administered with the animal feedstuff and for this purpose a concentrated feed additive or premix may be prepared for mixing with the normal animal feed.
  • the following table provides an illustrative example of the diseases and corresponding bacterial pathogens which can be treated with antibiotics such as those of the invention within the field of animal health.
  • Certain compounds of the invention are of particular use in the treatment of mastitis.
  • a particularly preferred method of administration is by injection into the udder of a subject (e.g. a cow, a goat, a pig or sheep).
  • Sensitive functional groups may need to be protected and deprotected during synthesis of a compound of the invention. This may be achieved by conventional methods, for example as described in "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis” by TW Greene and PGM Wuts, John Wiley & Sons Inc (1999), and references therein. Throughout this specification these abbreviations have the following meanings:
  • DIPEA diisopropylethylamine
  • DMAP N, N- dimethylaminopyridine
  • DMSO dimethyl sulfoxide
  • DPPA Diphenylphosphoryl azide
  • HATU 1-[Bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1 H-1 ,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium-3-oxide hexafluorophosphate
  • T3P propylphosphonic anhydride
  • TFA trifluoroacetic acid
  • Bromide (1) can be converted into (3) by reaction with the trifluoroborate salts of (2).
  • the reaction can be performed in the presence of a base, such as Cs 2 CO 3 , and Pd catalyst, such as palladium(ll)dichloride dichloromethane, in a solvent, such as a mixture of toluene and H 2 O.
  • a base such as Cs 2 CO 3
  • Pd catalyst such as palladium(ll)dichloride dichloromethane
  • Trifluoroborate salts of (2) can be prepared by Scheme B using the method of Marder et al (JOC, 2012, 77, 10399) and involving the reaction of bromide (4) with bis(pinacolato)diboron, LiOMe, triphenylphosphine polymer bound and Cul in DMF at room temperature, followed by aq. KHF2 in THF at room temperature.
  • Bromide (1) can be converted into (6) by reaction with the trifluoroborate salts of (5), where PG represents a nitrogen protecting group, such as BOC or Bn.
  • the reaction can be performed in the presence of a base, such as Cs 2 CO 3 , and Pd catalyst, such as palladium(ll)dichloride dichloromethane, in a solvent, such as a mixture of toluene and H 2 O, at a temperature from 70°C to 100°C.
  • Removal of the nitrogen PG in (6) can be performed under standard conditions. If the PG is a BOC then by the action of TFA in DCM at room temperature. If the PG is a Bn then by the action of H 2 in the presence of a Pd/C catalyst in 55
  • Compound (7) can be converted to (9) by coupling with (8), where LG represents a leaving group, such as a halide.
  • the reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K 2 CO 3 , with optional heating.
  • Trifluoroborate salts of (5) can be prepared by Scheme D using the method of Marder et al (JOC, 2012, 77, 10399) and involving the reaction of bromide (10) with bis(pinacolato)diboron, LiOMe, triphenylphosphine polymer bound and Cul in DMF at room temperature, followed by aq. KHF2 in THF at room temperature.
  • Tricycle (1 1) can be converted into (13) by reaction with (12), where LG represents a leaving group, such as a halide or tosyl group,
  • the reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K 2 CO 3 , with optional heating.
  • Tricycle (11) can be converted into (15) by reaction with (14), where LG represents a leaving group, such as a halide or tosyl group, and PG represents a nitrogen protecting group, such as BOC or Bn.
  • the reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K 2 CO 3 , with optional heating. Removal of the nitrogen PG in
  • (16) can be converted to (17) by coupling with (8), where LG represents a leaving group, such as a halide.
  • the reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K 2 CO 3 , with optional heating.
  • Bromide (18) can be converted to alkene (19) by reaction with allyltributylstannane in the presence of a Pd catalyst/phosphine ligand combination, such as bis(tri-tert- butylphosphine)palladium(O), in a solvent, such as 1 ,4-dioxane, with optional heating.
  • a Pd catalyst/phosphine ligand combination such as bis(tri-tert- butylphosphine)palladium(O)
  • Alkene (19) can be converted to aldehyde (20) by treatment with osmium tetroxide and sodium periodate in a solvent, such as a mixture of H 2 O in THF, at room temperature.
  • Reductive amination of (20) with amine (21), where PG represents a nitrogen protecting group, such as BOC or Bn, can be effected by first heating in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature of 50°C to 80°C, in the presence of 4A sieves, followed by treatment with sodium triacetoxyborohydride. Removal of the nitrogen PG in (22) to give amine (23) can be performed under standard conditions. If the PG is a BOC then by the action of TFA in DCM at room temperature. If the PG is a Bn then by the action of H 2 in the presence of a Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature.
  • a solvent such as THF
  • Amine (23) can be converted to (25) (a subset of compounds of formula II) by heating with aldehyde (24) in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature of 50°C to 80°C, in the presence of 4A sieves, followed by treatment with sodium triacetoxyborohydride.
  • Amine (23) can be converted to (26) (another subset of compounds of formula II) by coupling with (8), where LG represents a leaving group, such as a halide.
  • the reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K 2 CO 3 , with optional heating.
  • Bromide (18) can be converted to acid (27) by first forming the Grignard with Mg activated by 1 ,2-dibromoethane and Me 3 SiCI in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature from room temperature to 100°C, followed by quenching with CO 2 .
  • Coupling of the acid (27) to alcohol (28), where PG represents a nitrogen protecting group, such as BOC or Bn, can be effected with PPh 3 and DEAD in a solvent, such as toluene, at a temperature from 0°C to room temperature. Removal of the nitrogen PG in ester (29) to give amine (30) can be performed under standard conditions. If the PG is a BOC then by the action of TFA in DCM at room temperature. If the PG is a Bn then by the action of H 2 in the presence of a Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature. Amine (30) can be converted to
  • Pyridone (33) can be converted to alkene (34) by reaction with allyl bromide in a solvent, such as DMF, in the presence of a base, such as K 2 CO 3 , at a temperature from 100°C to 150°C.
  • Alkene (34) can be converted to aldehyde (35) by treatment with osmium tetroxide and sodium periodate in a solvent, such as a mixture of H 2 O in THF, at a temperature from 0°C to room temperature.
  • Reductive amination of aldehyde (35) with amine (21), where PG represents a nitrogen protecting group, such as BOC or Bn, can be effected by first heating in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature of 50°C to 80°C, in the presence of 4A sieves, followed by treatment with sodium triacetoxyborohydride. Removal of the nitrogen PG in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature of 50°C to 80°C, in the presence of 4A sieves, followed by treatment with sodium triacetoxyborohydride. Removal of the nitrogen PG in
  • amine (37) can be performed under standard conditions. If the PG is a BOC then by the action of TFA in DCM at room temperature. If the PG is a Bn then by the action of H 2 in the presence of a Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature. Amine (37) can be converted to (38) (a subset of compounds of formula III) by heating with aldehyde (24) in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature from 50°C to 80°C, in the presence of 4A sieves, followed by treatment with sodium triacetoxyborohydride. Amine
  • (37) can be converted to (39) (another subset of compounds of formula III) by coupling with (8), where LG represents a leaving group, such as a halide.
  • the reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K 2 CO 3 , with optional heating.
  • Ring opening of epoxide (40) (prepared as described in Scheme K) by tricycle (33) using a base, such as K 2 CO 3 or Cs 2 CO 3 , in a solvent, such as DMF, at a temperature from 70°C to 150°C can provide hydroxy (41) (a subset of compounds of formula (III)).
  • Conversion of the hydroxyl in (41) to the corresponding azide (42) can be accomplished under Mitsunobu reaction conditions using DPPA, DEAD and PPh 3 in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature from 0°C to room temperature.
  • Azide (42) can be converted to amine (43) (another subset of compounds of formula (III)) by reduction.
  • the reaction can be performed using PPh 3 in a solvent, such as a mixture of H 2 O in THF, at room temperature.
  • a solvent such as a mixture of H 2 O in THF
  • the reaction can be performed by hydrogenation in the presence of Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature.
  • Epoxide (40) can be made by Scheme K:
  • Carboxylic acid (44), where PG represents a nitrogen protecting group, such as BOC or Bn, can be converted to hydroxy (45) by reaction with ethyl chloroformate in the presence of a base, such as Et 3 N, in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature of 0°C, followed by treatment with NaBH 4 in a solvent, such as a mixture of H 2 O in THF, at a temperature from 5°C to room temperature. Oxidation of the hydroxyl to an aldehyde (e.g.
  • PG is a Bn then by the action of H 2 in the presence of a Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature.
  • Amine (48) can be converted to (40) by coupling with (8), where LG represents a leaving group, such as a halide.
  • the reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K 2 CO 3 , with optional heating.
  • Ring opening of epoxide (47) (prepared as described in Scheme K) by tricycle (33) using a base, such as K 2 CO 3 or Cs 2 CO 3 , in a solvent, such as DMF, at a temperature from 70°C to 150°C can provide hydroxy (49).
  • a base such as K 2 CO 3 or Cs 2 CO 3
  • a solvent such as DMF
  • Removal of the nitrogen PG in (49) to give amine (50) can be performed under standard conditions. If the PG is a BOC then by the action of TFA in DCM at room temperature. If the PG is a Bn then by the action of H 2 in the presence of a Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature.
  • Amine (50) can be converted to (51) (a subset of compounds of formula III) by heating with aldehyde (24) in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature from 50°C to 80°C, in the presence of 4A sieves, followed by treatment with sodium triacetoxyborohydride.
  • a solvent such as THF
  • Pyridone (52) can be converted to bromide (18) with (53), where LG represents a leaving group, such as halide or tosyl group.
  • the reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K 2 CO 3 , with optional heating.
  • Carboxylic acid (55) can be converted into benzoxazine-2,4-dione (56) by reaction with triphosgene in a halogenated solvent, such as 1 ,2-dichloroethane, at a temperature from room temperature to 75°C.
  • a halogenated solvent such as 1 ,2-dichloroethane
  • Et 3 N a halogenated solvent
  • EtOH ethyl nitroacetate
  • the nitro can be reduced to the amine (58) by hydrogenation in the presence of Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature.
  • the nitro can be reduced to the amine using sodium hydrosulphite in the presence of NaOH and H 2 O at room temperature.
  • Oxazole ring formation to (54) can be achieved by acylation of amine (58) with R 4 COCI in the presence of a base, such as Et 3 N, in a solvent, such as THF, followed by heating in a high boiling solvent.
  • Amine (66) can be converted into iodide (67) (e.g. by treating with iodine and NaHCO 3 in a solvent, such as EtOAc, at room temperature).
  • a solvent such as EtOAc
  • Acylation with an acid chloride (68) e.g. using Et 3 N in THF at room temperature
  • amide (69) which following an intramolecular Heck reaction (e.g. by heating amide (69) with Pd(PPh 3 )4 and NEt 3 in acetonitrile) can give tricycle (65).
  • amide (84) Acylation of amine (74) with pyrazole acid (83) (e.g. use of DIPEA and HATU in a solvent, such as DCM, at room temperature) by can provide amide (84), which can undergo an intramolecular ring closing reaction (e.g. by treatment with a base, such as K 2 CO 3 , in a solvent, such as DMF, at a temperature from 100°C to 150°C) to provide pyrazole (82).
  • a base such as K 2 CO 3
  • Benzoxazine-2,4-dione (56) (prepared as described in Scheme N) can be converted into ⁇ - ketoamide (99) by reaction with ethyl 3-(benzyloxy)propanoate (98) (e.g. with heating in DMF following deprotonation of (98) with NaH).
  • ethyl 3-(benzyloxy)propanoate (98) e.g. with heating in DMF following deprotonation of (98) with NaH).
  • Removal of the benzyl protecting group e.g. using Pd/C and H 2 in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature
  • oxidation of (100) e.g. using Dess-Martin Periodinane in a solvent, such as DCM, at room temperature
  • (101) Treatment of (101) with hydrazine (102) (e.g.
  • Displacement of the chloride in (104) by treatment with 4-methoxybenzylamine e.g. in an alcohol, such as isopropanol, at temperature from 80°C to 100°C
  • nitro e.g. by use of H 2 in the presence of RaNi in a solvent, such as THF, at room temperature
  • Amine (106) can be converted to dione (107) by heating in diethyloxalate, which on treatment with POCI3 (e.g. in the presence of a base, such as DIPEA, in a solvent, such as DMF, at a temperature from 80°C to 100°C) can provide chloride (108).
  • Chloride displacement with aminoacetal (109) can provide acetal (110), which in the presence of an acid (e.g. TFA in DCM) can cyclise with PMB deprotection to form imidazole (103).
  • Oxazole ring formation to (111) can be achieved by acylation of amine alcohol (115) with R 4 COCI in the presence of a base, such as Et 3 N, in a solvent, such as THF, followed by heating in a high boiling solvent.
  • the hydroxyl in (57) (prepared as described in Scheme N) can be converted to chloro (1 18) (e.g. by heating with POCl 2 ).
  • Displacement of the resultant chlorine with a protected amine e.g. para-methoxybenzylamine in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature
  • deprotecting the amine in the case of para-methoxybenzylamine this can be achieved using TFA in DCM at room temperature
  • the nitro in (1 19) can be reduced to amine (120) by hydrogenation in the presence of Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature.
  • the nitro can be reduced to the amine using sodium hydrosulphite in the presence of NaOH and H 2 O at room temperature.
  • Imidazole ring formation to (121) can be achieved by treatment with R 4 COOH in the presence of T3P and a base, such as Et 3 N, in a solvent, such as DMF, at a temperature from 80°C to 100°C.
  • R 4 H
  • imidazole ring closure can be affected by treatment with triethyl orthoformate at a temperature from 80°C to 1 10°C.
  • Intermediate (121) can be converted to (116) and (1 17) by reaction with R 5 -LG, where LG represents a leaving group, such as halide or tosyl group.
  • the reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or MeOH, in the presence of a base, such as K2C03 or NaH, with optional heating.
  • iodo (123) with alkyne (124) under Pd coupling e.g. use of Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 and Cul in the presence of a base, such as Et 3 N, in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature
  • a base such as Et 3 N
  • Oxidation of the triple bond to the dicarbonyl (126) can be achieved with KMnCU (e.g. in the presence of MgSO 4 and a base, such as NaHCO 3 , in a solvent, such as H 2 O, at room temperature).
  • Treatment of (126) with NH4OH in the presence of R 4 CHO can provide imidazole (127).
  • Nitro reduction to give amine (128) can be effected using sodium hydrosulphite in the presence of NaOH and H 2 O at room temperature.
  • Reaction of amine (128) with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (122).
  • Carboxylic acid (55) can be treated with ethoxycarbonyl isothiocyanate in a solvent, such as ACN, at a temperature of 80°C to form (130), which on treatment with AC2O at a temperature of 60°C can cyclise to (131).
  • Hydrolysis using a base e.g. use of NaOMe, in a solvent, such as ACN/THF, at a temperature from 60°C to 80°C
  • Treatment with iodomethane in the presence of a base e.g. use of NaOMe, in a solvent, such as MeOH, at room temperature
  • a base such as pyridine
  • Displacement of the resultant chlorine with a protected amine e.g. para- methoxybenzylamine in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature
  • deprotecting the amine in the case of para-methoxybenzylamine this can be achieved using TFA in DCM at room temperature
  • LG represents a leaving group, such as halide or tosyl, in a solvent, such as 1 ,4-dioxane, at a temperature from 70°C to 100°C
  • Removal of the SMe and formation of (129) can be effected by treatment with a base (e.g. use of KOH in a solvent, such as H 2 O/MeOH, at a temperature from 80°C to 100°C).
  • Chlorine displacement in (108) (prepared as described in Scheme W) with hydrazine (e.g. in a solvent, such as EtOH, with optional heating) can form (139), which on treatment with R 4 COCI, in the presence of a base, such as pyridine, with optional heating, followed by heating the resultant product in the presence of polyphosphoric acid, at a temperature from 100°C to 150°C can give triazole (140).
  • Removal of the PMB protecting group to give (138) can be effected with TFA (e.g. in a solvent, such as DCM, at room temperature).
  • Chlorine displacement in (134) (prepared as described in Scheme A1) with hydrazine (e.g. in a solvent, such as EtOH, with optional heating) can form (142), which on treatment with R 4 COCI, in the presence of a base, such as pyridine, with optional heating, followed by heating the resultant product in the presence of polyphosphoric acid, at a temperature from 100°C to 150°C can give triazole (143).
  • Removal of the SMe and formation of (141) can be effected by treatment with a base (e.g. use of KOH in a solvent, such as H 2 O/MeOH, at a temperature from 80°C to 100°C).
  • Carbamate (146) can be prepared from amine (145) by reaction with ethyl chloroformate in the presence of a base, such as NaHCO 3 , in a solvent, such as butanone. Treatment of (146) with hydrazide (147) in a solvent, such as NMP, at a temperature from 120°C to 180°C can give tricycle (144).
  • Tetrazole (156) can be prepared from cyanide (145) by reaction with NalsU in the presence of NH4CI, in a solvent, such as NMP, at a temperature from 30°C to 100°C. Treatment of amine (156) with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (155).
  • Amide coupling between amine (67) (prepared as described in Scheme P) and carboxylic acid (160) can be effected by standard amide coupling reagents, such as DCC in a solvent, such as DCM, in the presence of DMAP.
  • Standard amide coupling reagents such as DCC in a solvent, such as DCM
  • DMAP in the presence of DMAP.
  • Treatment of (161) with an azide, such as NaN 3 in the presence of Cul, in a solvent, such as DMSO, at a temperature from 50°C to 100°C, can form tricycle (159).
  • alkyne (164) Treatment of iodo (123) with alkyne (164) under Pd coupling (e.g. use of Pd(PPh3)2Cl 2 and Cul in the presence of a base, such as Et 3 N, in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature) can provide alkyne (165).
  • a base such as Et 3 N
  • a solvent such as DMF
  • benzyl azide e.g. with heating in toluene at a temperature from 50°C to 80°C
  • triazole e.g. with heating in toluene at a temperature from 50°C to 80°C
  • Nitro reduction of (166) followed by concomitant ring closure can be effected with Zn in the presence of AcOH, with optional heating, to give tricycle (167).
  • the benzyl protecting group of triazole (167) can be removed (e.g.
  • Intermediate (168) can be converted to (162) and (163) by reaction with R 5 -LG, where LG represents a leaving group, such as halide or tosyl group.
  • the reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or MeOH, in the presence of a base, such as K 2 CO 3 or NaH, with optional heating.
  • Silver mediated Pd catalyst CH arylation of (123) with isothiazole (170) (e.g. using AgF and Pd(PPh 3 ) 2 CI 2 and PPh 3 in a solvent, such as ACN, at a temperature from 50°C to 80°C) can provide (171).
  • Nitro reduction of (171), followed by concomitant ring closure can be effected with Fe in the presence of HCI, in a solvent mixture of EtOH/H 2 O, with optional heating, to give tricycle (172).
  • Carboxylic acid (55) can be converted to primary carboxamide (174) using standard amide coupling procedures, such as DCC in the presence of benzotriazole, in a solvent, such as DCM, followed by treatment with NH4OH in a solvent, such as THF. Further amide coupling of the amine (174) and carboxylic acid (160) can be effected by standard amide coupling reagents, such as DCC in a solvent, such as DCM, in the presence of DMAP.
  • Displacement of the chlorine in (113) (prepared as described in Scheme X) with NHR 5 (e.g. in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature) can provide amine (178).
  • the alcohol benzyl protecting group of amine (178) can be removed (e.g. using Pd/C and H 2 in an alcohol, such as EtOH, at room temperature) to provide amino alcohol (179).
  • Treatment of amino alcohol (179) with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (177).
  • Benzylation of the NH in benzoxazine-2,4-dione (56) can be effected with BnBr in the presence of a base, such as K 2 CO 3 , in a solvent such as DMF, with optional heating.
  • a base such as K 2 CO 3
  • a solvent such as DMF
  • Treatment of (181) with Et 3 N, followed by heating with ethyl nitroacetate in a solvent, such as THF, can provide the nitro (182), which can be reduced to the amine (183) using sodium hydrosulphite in the presence of NaOH and H 2 O at room temperature.
  • Treatment of amino alcohol (183) with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (184).
  • Hydrogenation of (84) e.g.
  • R 5 H.
  • Oxazolidone (184) can be converted to (185) by reaction with R 5 -LG, where LG represents a leaving group, such as halide or tosyl group.
  • the reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or MeOH, in the presence of a base, such as K2C03 or NaH, with optional heating.
  • Hydrogenation of (185) e.g. using Pd/C and H 2 in an alcohol, such as EtOH, at room temperature
  • the PMB group can be considered an alternative PG for the NH in benzoxazine-2,4-dione (56), where deprotection at the appropriate stage can be achieved using TFA in DCM at room temperature.
  • the hydroxyl in (182) (prepared as described in Scheme M1) can be converted to chloro (187) (e.g. by heating with POCI3).
  • Displacement of the chlorine in (187) with NHR 5 (e.g. in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature) can provide amine nitro (188).
  • the nitro can be reduced to the diamine (189) using sodium hydrosulphite in the presence of NaOH and H 2 O at room temperature.
  • Treatment of the diamine (189) with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (190).
  • the cyclic urea (190) can be converted to (191) by reaction with R 5 -LG, where LG represents a leaving group, such as halide or tosyl group.
  • reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or MeOH, in the presence of a base, such as K 2 CO 3 or NaH, with optional heating.
  • a base such as K 2 CO 3 or NaH
  • Hydrogenation of (191) e.g. using Pd/C and H 2 in an alcohol, such as EtOH, at room temperature
  • Displacement of the chlorine in (1 18) (prepared as described in Scheme Y) with thiourea (e.g. heating neat at 170°C to 190°C, followed by treatment with EtOH and NaOH) can provide nitro thiol (195).
  • the nitro can be reduced to the amino thiol (196) using Zn dust in the presence of concentrated HCI and AcOH, with optional heating, which on treatment with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (197).
  • Intermediate (197) can be converted to (194) by reaction with R 5 -LG, where LG represents a leaving group, such as halide or tosyl group.
  • the reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or MeOH, in the presence of a base, such as K 2 CO 3 or NaH, with optional heating.
  • the hydroxyl in (203) can be converted to chloro (204) (e.g. by heating with POCI 3 ).
  • Displacement of the chlorine in (204) with NHR 5 e.g. in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature
  • NHR 5 e.g. in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature
  • a Pummerer rearrangement of the methyl sulphoxide using trifluoroacetic anhydride in a solvent, such as DCM, followed by treatment with a base, such as Et 3 N in a solvent, such as MeOH, can give amino thiol (206), which on treatment with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (198).
  • Amide (33) can, for example, be converted to thioamide (207) by heating with P2S5 in pryridine.
  • Amide (33) can, for example, be converted to amidinine (208) by heating with POCI3 and heating the product with the primary amine NH 2 R 6 .
  • Amide (33) can, for example, be converted to oxime (209) by heating with POCI3 and heating the product with the O-substituted hydroxylamine NH 2 OR 6 .
  • Compounds of formula I where one of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 or X 4 represents an N-oxide can be made by oxidation of the corresponding pyridine substrate. The reaction can be effected using standard oxidising reagents, such as mCPBA, in a solvent, such as CH 2 CI2, at a temperature from 0°C to room temperature.
  • NMR spectra were obtained on a LC Bruker AV400 using a 5 mm QNP probe (Method A) or Bruker AVIII 400 Nanobay using a 5 mm BBFQ with z-gradients (Method B).
  • MS was carried out on a Waters ZQ MS (Method A, B, C and D) using H 2 O and ACN (0.1 % formic acid - acidic pH; 0.1 % ammonia - basic pH). Wavelengths were 254 and 210 nM.
  • Preparative HPLC was performed using a Waters 3100 Mass detector (Method A) or Waters 2767 Sample Manager (Method B) using H 2 O and ACN (0.1-% formic acid - acidic pH; 0.1 % ammonia - basic pH).
  • reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (207 mg, 0.98 mmol) was added and stirred at room temperature for a further 2 h.
  • the reaction mixture was diluted with saturated aq. NaHCO 3 solution (50 ml_) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 50 ml_). The combined organics were washed with brine (50 ml_), dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated in vacuo.
  • the crude product was purified by preperative TLC (DCM/MeOH 9:1) to furnish 6-( ⁇ [1-(2- ⁇ 4-oxo-4H ,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5- c]quinolin-5-yl ⁇ ethyl)piperidin-4-yl]amino ⁇ methyl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-1 ,4-benzoxazin-3-one B (3.8 mg, 5% yield) as a pale yellow soild.
  • step (a) 5- ⁇ 2-[4-( ⁇ 2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7- ylmethyl ⁇ amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl ⁇ -7-rnethoxy-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one C was synthesised as a white solid.
  • step (a) 5- ⁇ 2-[4-( ⁇ 2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7- ylmethyl ⁇ amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl ⁇ -7-meth ⁇ D was synthesised as a white solid.
  • reaction mixture was diluted with saturated aq. NaHCO 3 solution (5 ml_) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 5 ml_). The combined organics were washed with brine (5 ml_), dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated in vacuo to give a yellow oil.
  • step (a) 7-methoxy-5-(2-(4-r((3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pvridor3,2-biri.41oxazin-6- yl ⁇ methyl)arnino]piperidin-1-yl ⁇ ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one J was synthesised as a yellow solid.
  • step (g) 7- fluoro-5-(2- ⁇ 4-[( ⁇ 7-oxo-6H7H,8H-pyrimido[5,4-b][1 ,4loxazin-2-yl ⁇ methyl)aminolpiperidin-1- yl ⁇ ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one K was synthesised as an off white solid .
  • Example 12 -7-fluoro-5- ⁇ 2-[4-[( ⁇ 3-oxo-2H.3H.4H-pyridor3.2-b][1.4]oxazin-6- yl ⁇ methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl ⁇ ethyl)-4H,5H-[1,21oxazolor3,4-c]quinolin-4-one L
  • step (a) 7-fluoro-5-(2- ⁇ 4-[( ⁇ 3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl ⁇ methyl)amino]piperidin-
  • step (g) 5- ⁇ 2-[4-( ⁇ 2H,3H- [1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl ⁇ arnino)pipehdin-1-yl]ethyl ⁇ -7-fluoro-4H,5H- [1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one M was synthesised as a white solid.
  • step (g) 5- ⁇ 2-[4- ( ⁇ 2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl ⁇ amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl ⁇ -7-methoxy-4H,5H- [1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one_N was synthesised as a white solid.
  • Example 15 5- ⁇ 2-[4-[( ⁇ 3-oxo-2H.3H.4H-pyridor3.2-b][1.4]oxazin-6- yl ⁇ methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl ⁇ ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolor3,4-c]1 ,5-naphthyridin-6-one
  • step (a) 5-(2- ⁇ 4-[( ⁇ 3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl ⁇ methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl ⁇ ethyl)-4H,5H- [1,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]1,5-naphthyridin-6-one O was synthesised as an off white solid.
  • step (g) 5- ⁇ 2-[4-( ⁇ 2H,3H- [1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl ⁇ amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl ⁇ -5H,6H-[1,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]1,5- naphthyridin-6-one P was synthesised as an off white solid.
  • step (e) 5-(2- ⁇ 4-[( ⁇ 3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl ⁇ methyl)amino]piperidin-1- yl ⁇ ethyl)-4H,5H-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]quinoxalin-4-one_Q was synthesised as an off white solid.
  • step (e) 5-(2- ⁇ 4-[( ⁇ 3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl ⁇ methyl)amino]piperidin-1- yl ⁇ ethyl)-4H,5H-[1,2,3,4]tetrazolo[1,5-a]quinoxalin-4-one R was synthesised as a white solid.
  • step (e)_6-(2- ⁇ 4-[( ⁇ 3-oxo-2H,3H,4H- pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl ⁇ methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl ⁇ ethyl)-5H,6H-[1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5- c]quinazolin-5-one_T was synthesised as an off white solid.
  • Example 22 8-(2- ⁇ 4-r( ⁇ 3-oxo-2H.3H.4H-pyridor3.2-b][1,4]oxazin-6- yl ⁇ methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl ⁇ ethyl)-3,5,6,8,10-pentaazatricvclor7.4.0.0 2,6 ]trideca- 1 (9),2,4,10.12-pentaen-7-one V
  • reaction mixture was treated with H 2 O (50 ml_) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 25 ml_). The combined organics were washed with H 2 O (2 x 50 ml_), brine (50 ml_), dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated in vacuo.
  • reaction mixture was filtered and the filtrate loaded onto a Redisep C18 silica cartridge and eluted with 5% to 95% ACN in H 2 O/0.1 % NH 3 to give 5- ⁇ 2-hydroxy-2-[trans-4-[( ⁇ 3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6- yl ⁇ methyl)amino]cyclohexyl]ethyl ⁇ -7-methoxy-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one W (2 mg, 3% yield) as an off white solid.
  • MICs Minimum Inhibitory Concentrations versus planktonic bacteria are determined by the broth microdilution procedure according to the guidelines of the Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute. Methods for Dilution Antimicrobial Susceptibility Tests for Bacteria That Grow Aerobically; Approved Standard- Ninth Edition. CLSI document M07-A9, 2012).
  • the broth dilution method involves a two-fold serial dilution of compounds in 96-well microtitre plates, giving a final concentration range of 0.25-128 ⁇ g/mL and a maximum final concentration of 1 % DMSO.
  • the bacterial strains tested include the Gram-positive strains Staphylococcus aureus ATCC 29213, Staphylococcus aureus NRS1 , Staphylococcus aureus NRS74, Staphylococcus aureus NRS482, Staphylococcus epidermidis ATCC 12228, Staphylococcus epidermidis NRS101 , Streptococcus pneumoniae ATCC 49619, Streptococcus uberis DSM 20569, Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212, Enterococcus faecium ATCC 19434, the fluoroquinolone-resistant Enterococcus faecium ATCC 700221 and the Gram negative strains Acinetobacter baumannii NCTC 13420, Acinetobacter baumannii ATCC 19606, Enterobacter cloacae NCTC 13406, Escherichia coli ATCC 25922, E.
  • E. coli ATCC BAA-2452 E. coli NCTC 13476
  • E. coli MG1655 E. coli MG1655
  • coli clinical isolates CH440, CH460, CH418, CH448, Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 49247, Klebsiella pneumoniae ATCC 700603, Klebsiella pneumoniae NCTC 13443, Mycobacterium smegmatis ATCC 19420, Neisseria gonorrhoeae ATCC 49226, Neisseria meningitidis ATCC 13090, Pseudomonas aeruginosa ATCC 27853, Serratia marcescens ATCC 13880, Stenotrophomonas maltophilia ATCC 13637. Additionally, two fluoroquinolone-resistant mutant strains of each S. aureus ATCC 29213 and E.
  • coli ATCC 25922 were generated in- house using a serial passage method with ciprofloxacin at sub-inhibitory concentrations. These strains are referred to as S. aureus SACPX1-SP25 and SACPX1-SP28 and E. coli ECCPX1-SP22 and ECCPX1-SP25.
  • the antimicrobial susceptibility profile of Clostridium difficile was determined by estimating MIC using the agar dilution method according to the guidelines of the CLSI criteria for anaerobes (Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute. Methods for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing of Anaerobic Bacteria; Approved Standard-Eighth Edition. CLSI document M11-A8, 2012).
  • Stock solutions of vancomycin and ciprofloxacin were made in water at 5120 ⁇ g/mL.
  • Stock solutions of compounds were made in DMSO at 12800 ⁇ g/mL.
  • the antimicrobial activity of compounds against M. tuberculosis H37Rv grown under aerobic conditions was assessed by measuring bacterial growth after 5 days in the presence of test compounds.
  • Compounds were prepared as 20-point two-fold serial dilutions in DMSO and diluted into 7H9-Tw-OADC medium in 96-well plates with a final DMSO concentration of 2%. The highest concentration of compound was 200 ⁇ where compounds were soluble in DMSO at 10 mM.
  • Microbial growth was measured by OD590 and fluorescence (Ex 560/Em 590) using a BioTekTM Synergy 4 plate reader. To determine the MIC, the dose response curve was plotted as % growth and fitted to the Gompertz model using GraphPad Prism 5. The MIC was defined as the minimum concentration at which growth was completely inhibited and was calculated from the inflection point of the fitted curve to the lower asymptote (zero growth).
  • the strains tested include M. tuberculosis H37Rv, two isoniazid resistant strains, INH-R1 (derived from M. tuberculosis H37Rv KatG mutant, Y155 truncation) and INH-R2 (strain ATCC 35822), two rifampicin resistant strains, RIF-R1 (derived from H37Rv, RpoB S522L mutant) and RIF-R2 (strain ATCC 35828) and a fluoroquinolone resistant strain, FQ-R1 derived from H37Rv (GyrB D94N mutant).
  • the antimicrobial activity of compounds against M. tuberculosis H37Rv grown under hypoxic conditions was assessed using the low oxygen recovery assay (LORA).
  • LORA low oxygen recovery assay
  • Bacteria were first adapted to low oxygen conditions and then exposed to compounds under hypoxia. The method used was as described above for aerobic conditions with the following modifications: M. tuberculosis constitutively expressing the luxABCDE operon was inoculated into DTA medium in gas-impermeable glass tubes and incubated for 18 days to generate hypoxic conditions (Wayne model of hypoxia). At this point, bacteria are in a non-replicating state (NRP stage 2) induced by oxygen depletion.
  • NTP stage 2 non-replicating state
  • Oxygen-deprived bacteria were inoculated into compound assay plates and incubated under anaerobic conditions for 10 days followed by incubation under aerobic conditions (outgrowth) for 28h. Growth was measured by luminescence. Oxygen-deprived bacteria were also inoculated into compound assay plates and incubated under aerobic conditions for 5 days.
  • THP-1 cells The activity of compounds against intracellular bacteria was determined by measuring viability in infected THP-1 cells (macrophage-like cells) after 3 days in the presence of test compounds. Compounds were prepared as 10-point three-fold serial dilutions in DMSO. The highest concentration of compound tested was 50 ⁇ where compounds were soluble in DMSO at 10 mM.
  • THP-1 cells were cultured in complete RPMI medium and differentiated into macrophage-like cells using 80 nM PMA overnight at 37°C, 5% C02. THP-1 cells were infected with a luminescent strain of H37Rv (which constitutively expresses luxABCDE) at a multiplicity of infection of 1 and incubated overnight at 37°C, 5% C02.
  • Infected cells were recovered using Accutase/EDTA solution, washed twice with PBS to remove extracellular bacteria and seeded into assay pates. Compound dilutions were added to a final DMSO concentration of 0.5%. Assay plates were incubated for 72 h at 37°C, 5% C02. Relative luminescent units (RLU) were measured using a Biotek Synergy 2 plate reader. The dose response curve was fitted using the Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm. The IC50 was defined as the compound concentrations that produced 50% inhibition of microbial growth.
  • M. abscessus plates were inoculated and incubated for 3 days at 37°C; growth was measured by OD590.
  • the dose response curve was plotted as % growth and fitted to the Gompertz model and the MIC was defined as the minimum concentration at which growth was completely inhibited and was calculated from the inflection point of the fitted curve to the lower asymptote (zero growth).
  • M. avium plates were inoculated and incubated for 5 days at 37°C and Alamar blue was added to each well (10 ⁇ _ of Alamar blue to 100 ⁇ _ culture) and incubated for a further 24 h at 37°C. Plates were visually inspected and the colour recorded for each well. MIC was defined as the lowest concentration at which no metabolic activity was seen (blue well).
  • an MIC (in ⁇ / ⁇ .) of less or equal to 1 is assigned the letter A; a MIC of from 1 to 10 is assigned the letter B; a MIC of from 10 to 100 is assigned the letter C; and a MIC of over 100 is assigned the letter D.
  • MRSE methicillin-resistant S. epidermidis
  • Compound A shows good activity against MRSE.
  • the compound's activity against MRSE is broadly the same as its activity against wild-type S. epidermidis.
  • CIP ciprofloxacin
  • LEV levofloxacin
  • CIP ciprofloxacin
  • LEV levofloxacin
  • compounds B, C, D, E, F, J, and O showed an eight-fold increase in MIC against both FQR mutant strains compared to the wild-type parent strain E. coli ATCC 25922 and were less susceptible to the gyrase S83L and D87G mutations than the fluoroquinolone antibiotics.
  • Compound N showed a four-fold increase in MIC against both FQR mutant strains compared to the wild-type parent strain E. coli ATCC 25922 and was less susceptible to the gyrase S83L and D87G mutations than the fluoroquinolone antibiotics and the other compounds tested.
  • a MIC (in ⁇ g/mL) of less than or equal to 1 is assigned the letter A; a MIC of from 1 to 10 is assigned the letter B; a MIC of from 10 to 100 is assigned the letter C; and a MIC of over 100 is assigned the letter D.
  • Compound F showed excellent activity against M. smegmatis ATCC 19420 and against the virulent strain M. tuberculosis H37Rv in aerobic conditions. Compound F also showed excellent activity against intracellular bacteria and retained good activity against M. tuberculosis strains resistant isoniazid (INH-R), rifampicin (RIF-R) and fluoroquinolone (FQ- R). Compound F also showed good activity against non-tuberculosis strains such as M. avium and M. abscessus.
  • a MIC (in ⁇ g/mL) of less than or equal to 1 is assigned the letter A; a MIC of from 1 to 10 is assigned the letter B; a MIC of from 10 to 100 is assigned the letter C; and a MIC of over 100 is assigned the letter D.
  • Compound N showed excellent activity against all C. difficile strains tested, including ciprofloxacin-resistant strains.
  • HepG2 ATCC HB-8065 Human hepatic cell line
  • HepG2 cells are seeded at 20,000 cells/well in 96-well microtitre plates in minimal essential medium (MEM) supplemented with a final concentration of 10% FBS and 1 mM sodium pyruvate.
  • MEM minimal essential medium
  • FBS FBS
  • 1 mM sodium pyruvate a final concentration of 10% FBS and 1 mM sodium pyruvate.
  • DM EM Dulbecco's minimum essential media
  • the tested compounds show low toxicities against human hepatic cell lines.
  • compound A showed no detectable toxicity against human hepatic cell lines.
  • Compound A therefore shows an excellent therapeutic benefit relative to its hepatic toxicity as expressed by the ratio of hepatic toxicity.
  • compounds A, C, D, F, O, R, S, T and U showed no detectable toxicity against the tested human hepatic cell lines. These compounds therefore show an excellent therapeutic benefit relative to their hepatic toxicities.
  • Compounds E, G, H, I, J and N also demonstrate an acceptable level of hepatic toxicity relative to therapeutic activity. This indicates that these compounds have the potential to have an excellent therapeutic benefit relative to their hepatic toxicity.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

This invention relates to antibacterial drug compounds containing a tricyclic ring system. It also relates to pharmaceutical formulations of antibacterial drug compounds. It also relates to uses of the derivatives in treating bacterial infections and in methods of treating bacterial infections. The invention is also directed to antibacterial drug compounds which are capable of treating bacterial infections which are currently hard to treat with existing drug compounds.

Description

Antibacterial compounds
This invention relates to antibacterial drug compounds containing a tricyclic ring system. It also relates to pharmaceutical formulations of antibacterial drug compounds. It also relates to uses of the derivatives in treating bacterial infections and in methods of treating bacterial infections. The invention is also directed to antibacterial drug compounds which are capable of treating bacterial infections which are currently hard to treat with existing drug compounds. Such infections are frequently referred to as resistant strains.
The increasing occurrence of bacterial resistance to antibiotics is viewed by many as being one of the most serious threats to the future health and happiness of mankind. Multidrug resistance has become common among some pathogens, e.g. Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Clostridium difficile and Pseudomonas aeruginosa. Of these, Staphylococcus aureus, a Gram-positive bacterium, is the most concerning due to its potency and its capacity to adapt to environmental conditions. MRSA (methicillin resistant Staphylococcus aureus) is probably the most well-known group of resistant strains and has reached pandemic proportions. Of particular concern is the increasing incidence of 'community acquired' infections, i.e. those occurring in subjects with no prior hospital exposure. While less widespread, antibiotic resistant Gram-negative strains, such as either Escherichia coli NDM-1 (New Delhi metallo-β-lactamase) or Klebsiella pneumoniae NDM-1 , are also very difficult to treat. Frequently only expensive antibiotics such as vancomycin and colistin are effective against these strains.
The fluoroquinolone antibacterial family are synthetic broad-spectrum antibiotics. They were originally introduced to treat Gram-negative bacterial infections, but are also used for the treatment of Gram-positive strains. One problem with existing fluoroquinolones can be the negative side effects that may sometimes occur as a result of fluoroquinolone use. In general, the common side-effects are mild to moderate but, on occasion, more serious adverse effects occur. Some of the serious side effects that occur, and which occur more commonly with fluoroquinolones than with other antibiotic drug classes, include central nervous system (CNS) toxicity and cardiotoxicity. In cases of acute overdose there may be renal failure and seizure. In addition, an increasing number of strains of MRSA are also resistant to fluoroquinolone antibiotics, in addition to β-lactam antibiotics such as methicillin. Gonorrhoea is a human sexually-transmitted infection (STI) caused by the Gram-negative bacterium Neisseria gonorrhoeae, a species of the genus Neisseria that also includes the pathogen N. meningitidis, which is one of the aetiological agents of meningitis. Untreated infection can result in a range of clinical complications including urethritis, dysuria, epididymitis, pelvic inflammatory disease, cervicitis, endometritis and even infertility and ectopic pregnancy. In rare cases, gonorrhoea can also spread to the blood to cause disseminated gonococcal infection that can manifest as arthritis, endocarditis or meningitis. Human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) is more readily-transmitted in individuals co-infected with gonorrhoea. Throughout the twentieth and twenty-first centuries gonorrhoea has been treated with a range of antibiotics. The sulphonamides were the first antibiotics used for the treatment of gonorrhoea, followed by penicillin, tetracycline and spectinomycin. In each case the development of resistance to these drugs by N. gonorrhoeae led to their use being discontinued. The fluoroquinolone antibiotics ciprofloxacin and ofloxacin were also historically recommended for the treatment of gonorrhoea. However, by 2007, fluoroquinolone resistance rates had reached 15% of gonococcal isolates and their use was abandoned. Current treatment recommendations comprise the cephalosporin antibiotics cefixime or ceftriaxone in combination with azithromycin or doxycycline. Resistance to cefixime and ceftriaxone has emerged in recent years. The CDC estimates that approximately 246,000 of the 820,000 gonococcal infections per year in the United States are drug-resistant (Antibiotic Resistance Threats in the United States, 2013, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention).
Another disease in which the development of resistance and multidrug resistance is of particular concern is TB. From the 17th century to the early-20th century TB was one of the most common causes of death, particularly amongst the urban poor. The development of effective treatments and vaccinations through the middle part of the 20th century led to a sharp reduction in the number of deaths arising from the disease. TB is usually caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis. Mycobacteria are aerobic bacteria and, as a result, tuberculosis infections most often develop in the lungs (pulmonary tuberculosis), although this is not always the case. Mycobacteria lack an outer cell membrane and as such they are often classified as Gram-positive bacteria, although they are in many ways atypical. They have a unique cell wall which provides protection against harsh conditions (e.g. acidic, oxidative) but also provides natural protection against many antibiotics. Other antibiotics, such as beta-lactams, are inactive against TB due to the intrinsic activity of the compounds in the mycobacteria. Thus, a drug molecule may have excellent activity against other bacterial strains but no activity against wild-type TB. A number of TB-specific antibiotics have been developed, such as isoniazid, rifampicin, pyrazinamide and ethambutol and these are typically used in combination. Unfortunately, there is now increasing incidence of multidrug-resistant TB (MDR-TB). MDR-TB often arises when a treatment for TB has been interrupted. MDR-TB is the term typically used to refer to TB which has developed a resistance to isoniazid and rifampicin. MDR-TB can also be resistant to fluoroquinolones and also to the so-called 'second line' injectable anti-TB drugs: kanamycin, capreomycin and amikacin, with such resistances again commonly developing due to interruptions in treatment regimes. Where a strain of TB is resistant to isoniazid and rifampicin as well as one fluoroquinolone and one of the injectable anti-TB drugs, it is known as extensively drug resistant (XDR-TB). MDR-TB and XDR-TB are often found in those who have been previously treated for TB, but these forms of TB are just as infectious as wild-type TB and the incidence of MDR-TB and XDR-TB around the world is increasing. According to a 2013 World Health Organisation report, infections arising from XDR-TB had at that time been identified in 84 different countries. There have even been some reports of strains of TB which were resistant to all drugs tested against them (so-called 'totally drug resistant tuberculosis', TDR-TB). The 'second line' anti-TB drugs and other antibiotics typically used to treat resistant infections can have unfavourable side effects.
Bacterial resistance is also becoming a problem in the treatment of animals. Antibacterials find widespread use in industrial farming, e.g. to prevent mastitis in dairy cattle, where they are often used prophylactically. Such widespread prophylactic use has led to the build-up of resistance in certain bacterial strains which are particularly relevant to animal health.
In spite of the numerous different antibiotics known in the art for a variety of different infections, there continues to be a need for antibiotics that can provide an effective treatment in a reliable manner. In addition, there remains a need for antibiotic drugs which can avoid or reduce the side-effects associated with known antibiotics.
It is an aim of certain embodiments of this invention to provide new antibiotics. In particular, it is an aim of certain embodiments of this invention to provide antibiotics which are active against resistant strains of Gram-positive and/or Gram-negative bacteria. It is an aim of certain embodiments of this invention to provide compounds which have activity which is comparable to those of existing antibiotics, and ideally which is better. It is an aim of certain embodiments of this invention to provide such activity against wild-type strains at the same time as providing activity against one or more resistant strains. It is an aim of certain embodiments of this invention to provide compounds which exhibit a smaller reduction in activity against resistant strains compared to wild-type strains than prior art compounds do. It may be that certain compounds of the invention are less active than prior art compounds but there is a benefit associated with having a more consistent activity against a range of strains.
It is an aim of certain embodiments of this invention to provide antibiotics which exhibit reduced cytotoxicity relative to prior art compounds and existing therapies.
It is an aim of certain embodiments of this invention to provide treatment of bacterial infections which is effective in a selective manner at a chosen site of interest. Another aim of certain embodiments of this invention is to provide antibiotics having a convenient pharmacokinetic profile and a suitable duration of action following dosing. A further aim of certain embodiments of this invention is to provide antibiotics in which the metabolised fragment or fragments of the drug after absorption are GRAS (Generally Regarded As Safe).
Certain embodiments of the present invention satisfy some or all of the above aims.
Compounds of the Invention
In a first aspect, the invention provides a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or N-oxide thereof:
Figure imgf000005_0001
wherein R1 is selected from R2 or R3
R2 represents the group:
Figure imgf000005_0002
X1 and X2 are each independently selected from: N and CR4; X3 is independently selected from: N, C=0 and CR4; X4 is selected from N, NR2, NR3, CR2 and CR4; wherein a single one of R1 and X4 comprises the group R2; and wherein no more than two of X1 , X2, X3 and X4 are N;
the bond between X3 and X4 is a single bond or a double bond; wherein when X4 is NR2 or NR3, the bond between X3 and X4 is a single bond and X3 is C=0; and when X4 is selected from N, CR2 and CR4 the bond between X3 and X4 is a double bond and X3 is selected from N and CR4;
Y1 and Y2 are each independently selected from C and N; Z1 , Z2 and Z3 are each independently selected from O, S, S(O), NR5, CR4 and C=W; wherein W is selected from O, S or NR6; wherein when none of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is C=W, then the ring formed by Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 contains two endocyclic double bonds, and when one of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is C=W, then the ring formed by Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 contains a single endocyclic double bond; and with the further provisos that at least one of Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 is O, S, N or NR5 and that no more than one of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is C=W;
=A is independently selected from: =0, =S, =NR6 and =NOR6;
L1 is a linker group having the form -(CR9R9)rU1-U2-(CR9R9)s-U3-(CR9R10)r; wherein U1 , U2 and U3 are each independently selected from: a bond, CO, O, S and NR11 ; wherein r, s, and t are each independently an integer selected from 0, 1 , 2 and 3 and wherein definitions of r, s, t, U1 , U2 and U3 are chosen such that the total length of the linker group is 1 , 2, 3 or 4 atoms;
L2 is 4-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl ring or a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7- membered heterocycloalkyl ring;
L3 is absent or is -N(R8)L4-;
L4 is independently selected from -CR9R9- and a 3-, 4- or 5-membered cycloalkyl ring or a 4- or 5-membered heterocycloalkyl ring;
R3 and R11 are each independently at each occurrence selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4- haloalkyl, S(O)2-C1-C4-alkyl and C(O)-C1-C4-alkyl;
R4 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, halo, nitro, cyano, NR6R11 , NR6S(O)2R6, NR6CONR6R6, NR6C(O)R6, NR6CO2R6, OR6; O-aryl, SR6, SOR6, SO3R6, SO2R6, SO2NR6R6, CO2R6, C(O)R6, CONR6R6, aryl, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl;
R5 is absent or is independently selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, and C1-C4-haloalkyl;
R6 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H , C1-C4-alkyl, and C1-C4-haloalkyl;
R7 is a monocyclic aromatic or heteroaromatic ring or R7 is a bicyclic carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system in which at least one of the two rings is aromatic or heteroaromatic;
R8 is independently selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-haloalkyl, S(O)2-C1-C4-alkyl and
C(O)-C1-C4-alkyl; or L2 and R8 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached together form a saturated 5-, 6- or 7- membered monocyclic heterocycloalkyl ring or a saturated 7-,
8- or 9- membered bicyclic heterocycloalkyl ring system;
R9 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, Me, and CF3;
R10 is independently at each occurrence selected from: R9, OR6, CO2R6 and NR6R11 ; wherein each of the aforementioned alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, carbocyclic, heterocycloalkyl, aryl (e.g. phenyl) and heteroaryl groups and aromatic and heteroaromatic rings is optionally substituted, where chemically possible, by 1 to 5 substituents which are each independently at each occurrence selected from the group consisting of: =0, =S, =NRa, =NORa, halo, nitro, cyano, NRaRa, NRaS(O)2Ra, NRaC(O)Ra, NRaCONRaRa, NRaCO2Ra, ORa; SRa, SORa, SO3Ra, SO2Ra, SO2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, CRaRaNRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl; wherein Ra is independently at each occurrence selected from H, C1-C4-alkyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl;
For the absence of doubt, the linker group L1 is arranged such that L2 is attached to the end of linker group L1 which is defined as (CR9R10)t. Thus, the end of linker group L1 which is defined as (CR9R9)r is attached to the rest of the molecule at the point of contact of the group R2.
In an embodiment, the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (II):
Figure imgf000007_0001
wherein R3, R7, A, X1 , X2, X3, Z1 , Z2 , Z3, Y1 , Y2, L1, L2 and L3 are as defined above for formula (I).
In an embodiment, the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (III):
Figure imgf000007_0002
wherein R7, A, X1 , X2, X3, Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 , Y2, L1, L2 and L3 are as defined above for formula (I) and wherein X4 is N or CR4, R4 being as defined above for formula (I).
In an embodiment, the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (IV):
Figure imgf000008_0004
wherein R3, R4, R7, X1 , X2, X3, L1 , L2 and L3 are as defined above for formula (I). In an embodiment, the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (V):
Figure imgf000008_0001
wherein R4, R7, X1 , X2, X3, L1, L2 and L3 are as defined above for formula (I) and wherein X4 is N or CR4.
In an embodiment, the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (VI):
wherein R4, R7, L1 , L2 and L3 are as defined above for formula (I).
In an embodiment, the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula
Figure imgf000008_0003
wherein R3, R4, R7, L1 , L2 and L3 are as defined above for formula (I). In an embodiment, the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (VIII):
Figure imgf000009_0001
wherein R1, R4, A, X1 , X2, X3, and X4 are as defined above for formula (I).
In an embodiment, the compound of formula (I) has a structure according to any more of formulae (IX) to (XXXXXVII):
Figure imgf000009_0002
Figure imgf000010_0001
Figure imgf000011_0001
Figure imgf000012_0003
wherein R1, R4, R5, A, X1 , X2, X3, X4 and W are as defined above for formula (I) and wherein R5 is independently selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, and C1-C4-haloalkyl. The compound may thus be a compound of formula (XXIV).
In an embodiment, the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (XXXXXVIII):
Figure imgf000012_0002
wherein R4, R7, X1 , X2, X3, L1, L2 and L3 are as defined above for formula (I) and wherein X4 is N or CR4.
In an embodiment, the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (XXXXXIX):
Figure imgf000012_0001
wherein Z\ Z2, Z3, Y1 , Y2, L4, R8, R9, R10 are as described above for compounds of formula (I); R4a is selected from H, F, NR6R11 , OR6, O-aryl and SR6; W1 is N or CR13; R12 is independently at each occurrence selected from: halo, nitro, cyano, NRaRa, NRaS(O)2Ra, NRaCONRaRa, NRaC(O)Ra, NRaCO2Ra, ORa; SRa, S(O)Ra, S(O)2ORa, S(O)2Ra, S(O)2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl, and C1-C4-haloalkyl; or any two R12 groups which are attached to the same carbon form a group selected from: =0, =S, =NRa and =NORa; R13 is independently selected from H and R12; and n is an integer selected from 0, 1 , 2, 3 and 4; V1 , V2 and V3 are each independently selected from: N and CR4; with the proviso that no more than two of V1 , V2 and V3 are N; and wherein the ring B is a substituted or unsubstituted 5- or 6- membered saturated cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl ring. It may be that both Y1 and Y2 are C, a single one of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is N and that N must form part of a C=N endocyclic double bond; a single one of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is CR4 and the remaining Z1 , Z2 or Z3 is selected from O and S.
In an embodiment, the compound of formula (I) is selected from a compound of formula (XXXXXX) and a compound of formula (XXXXXXI):
Figure imgf000013_0001
wherein L4, R4, R8, R9, R10 are as described above for compounds of formula (I); and wherein R4a, W1 , R12, n, V1 , V2 and V3 are as described above for compounds of formula (XXXXXIX).
The following statements apply to compounds of any of formulae (I) to (XXXXXXI). These statements are independent and interchangeable. In other words, any of the features described in any one of the following statements may (where chemically allowable) be combined with the features described in one or more other statements below. In particular, where a compound is exemplified or illustrated in this specification, any two or more of the statements below which describe a feature of that compound, expressed at any level of generality, may be combined so as to represent subject matter which is contemplated as forming part of the disclosure of this invention in this specification.
It may be that X4 is selected from N, NR3, CR2 and CR4. It may be that X4 is selected from N, NR3 and CR4
It may be that the bond between X3 and X4 is a double bond; X1 , X2 and X3 are each independently selected from: N and CR4; and X4 is selected from N, CR2 and CR4.
It may be that R1 is R3 and X4 is CR2. R1 may be H or C1-C4-alkyl. Alternatively, it may be that R1 is R2 and X4 is selected from N or CR4.
It may be that none of X1 , X2, X3 and X4 is N. It may be that a single one of X1 , X2, X3 and X4 is N. It may be that X1 is N .
It may be that at least one of X1 , X2, X3 and X4 is CR4a wherein R4a is selected from H, CN, halo, NR6R11 , OR6, O-aryl, SR6, e.g. selected from halo, CN, NR6R11 , OR6; O-aryl, SR6. It may be that R4a is selected from H, CN, F and OR6. It may be that a single one of X1 , X2, X3 and X4 is CR4a. It may be that R4a is OR6. In some preferred embodiments, R4a is O-C1-C4- alkyl, e.g. OMe. In other preferred embodiments, R4a is halo, e.g. F.
It may be that X1 , X2 and X4 are each CH.
It may be that X3 is CR4a, wherein R4a is selected from H, halo, CN, NR6R11 , OR6, O-aryl and SR6. R4a may be selected from: F, CN, NR6R11 , OR6; O-aryl and SR6. R4a may be selected from: NR6R11 , OR6; O-aryl and SR6. It may be that R4a is selected from H, F, CN and OR6. R4a may be selected from F, CN and OR6, e.g. from F and OR6. It may be that R4a is OR6. In some preferred embodiments, R4a is 0-C1-C4-alkyl, e.g. OMe. In other preferred embodiments, R4a is halo, e.g. F. Alternatively, X3 may be CH.
It may be that X3 is C=0 and X4 is NR2. It may be that X3 is C=0 and X4 is NR3. Preferably, R3 is selected from H and C1-C4-alkyl. Thus, R3 may be selected from H and methyl.
It may be that =A is selected from =0 and =S. Preferably, Where U1 is CO, U2 is preferably independently selected from: a bond, O, S and NR11 , e.g. U2 is independently selected from NR11 or O. Likewise, where U2 is CO, U1 is preferably independently selected from: a bond, O, S and NR11 , e.g. U1 is independently selected from NR11 or O.
L1 may be a linker group of the form -C(=O)U2-(CR9R9)s(CR9R10)r, wherein U2 is independently selected from: a bond, O, S and NR11 , e.g. wherein U2 is independently selected from NR11 or O. In particular, L1 may be a linker group of the form -C(=0)0- (CR9R9)s(CR9R10)r, e.g. -C(=0)0-(CR9R9)s
It may be that one of U1 and U2 is CO and the other is O. Such compounds, including the examples of such compounds mentioned in the previous paragraph, may find particular use in the treatment of mastitis in domestic animals, e.g. by direct application (either topical or by injection) to the udder of a subject.
Preferably, L1 is an alkylene chain of the form -(CR9R9)r(CR9R10)r.
Where L2 is a heterocycloalkyl ring having a nitrogen atom in the ring, and where L1 is attached to L2 through that nitrogen atom, it is preferable that t is absent, e.g. it is preferable that L1 is a linker group of the form -(CR9R9)rU1-U2-(CR9R9)s- wherein s is an integer selected from 1 , 2 and 3. Thus, L1 may be a linker group of the form -(CR9R9)S-.
When R1 is R2, r is preferably an integer selected from 1 , 2 or 3.
It may be that t is 1 and R10 is OR6 (e.g. OH). It may be that t is 2 and R10 is at each occurrence OR6 (e.g. OH). It may be that t is 1 and R10 is NR6R11 , (e.g. NH2).
Preferably, R9 is at each occurrence H.
It may be that the total length of the -L1- linker group (i.e. the number of atoms in a continuous chain between L2 and the point of contact of R2 to the rest of the molecule) is 2 or 3 atoms, e.g. the total length of the linker group is 2 atoms.
Specific examples of L1 include -CH2CH2-, -CH2CH2CH2, -CH2CH(NH2)-, -CH(OH)CH(OH)-, CH2CH(OH) and -CH(OH)CH2CH2-. L1 may also be -CO2CH2-. L2 may be a saturated 5-, 6- or 7- membered monocyclic cycloalkyl or heterocycloakyl ring. L2 is preferably a saturated 6-membered monocyclic cycloalkyl or heterocycloakyl ring. The groups L1 and N(R7)L3R8 are preferably attached to L2 para to each other, i.e. the 6- membered monocyclic cycloalkyl or heterocycloakyl ring is 1 , 4-substituted with respect to the groups L1 and N(R7)L3R8.
L2 may therefore be a cyclohexyl ring. L2 may also be a tetrahydropyran ring. L2 may also be a piperidine ring. Where L2 is a piperidine ring, it may be linked to L1 through the nitrogen in the piperidine ring. If this is not the case, the nitrogen in the piperidine ring will take the form NR11 group. Thus, L2 may take the form:
Figure imgf000016_0001
wherein W1 is N or CR13; R12 is independently at each occurrence selected from: halo, nitro, cyano, NRaRa, NRaS(O)2Ra, NRaCONRaRa, NRaC(O)Ra, NRaCO2Ra, ORa; SRa, S(O)Ra, S(O)2ORa, S(O)2Ra, S(O)2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4 alkenyl, C4-alkynyl, and C1-C4-haloalkyl; or any two R12 groups which are attached to the same carbon form a group selected from: =0, =S, =N Ra and =NORa; R13 is independently selected from H and R12; and n is an integer selected from 0, 1 , 2, 3 and 4. For the absence of doubt, the group W1 is the point of connection of the group L2 to the linker group L1.
It may be that W1 is N. If this is the case it is preferable that L1 is a linker group of the form - (CR9R9)гU1-U2-(CR9R9)s- wherein s is an integer selected from 1 , 2 and 3.
Alternatively, it may be that W1 is CR13. Preferably R13 is H.
Specific examples of L2 groups include:
Figure imgf000016_0002
It may be that L2 is a saturated 7-, 8- or 9- membered bicyclic cycloalkyl or heterocyclic ring. Thus in any of formulae (I) to (XXXXXVIII), L2 may be selected from a saturated 4-, 5-, 6- or 7- membered monocyclic cycloalkyl or heterocyclic ring and a saturated 7-, 8- or 9- membered bicyclic cycloalkyl or heterocyclic ring system. This might particularly apply where R1 is R3 and X4 is CR2. It might particularly apply where Z2 is C=W, e.g. C=0. It might also apply where one of U1 and U2 is CO and the other is O.
A specific example of an L2 group would be:
Figure imgf000017_0001
It may be that L2 and R8 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached together form a saturated 5-, 6- or 7- membered monocyclic heterocycloalkyl ring, e.g. a piperidine ring. If so, L1 is preferably attached to the piperidine ring at the 4-position relative to the piperidine nitrogen.
Thus, the group -L2NR8- may take the form:
Figure imgf000017_0002
wherein R12 is independently at each occurrence selected from: halo, nitro, cyano, NRaRa, NRaS(O)2Ra, NRaCONRaRa, NRaCO2Ra, NRaC(O)Ra, ORa; SRa, S(O)Ra, S(O)2ORa, S(O)2Ra, S(O)2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl and C1-C4- haloalkyl; or any two R12 groups which are attached to the same carbon form a group selected from: =0, =S, =NRa and =NORa; and n is an integer selected from 0, 1 , 2, 3 and 4.
A specific example of an L2 group would be:
Figure imgf000017_0003
Thus, -L1-L2- may take the form:
Figure imgf000018_0001
L3 may be absent. Thus, R2 may be
Figure imgf000019_0001
Alternatively, L3 may be -N(R8)L4-. Thus, R2 may be
Figure imgf000019_0002
L4 is preferably -CR9R9- and most preferably is -CH2-. Alternatively, L4 may be a 3-, 4- or 5- membered cycloalkyl ring, e.g. a 4-membered cycloalkyl ring.
It may be that Y1 and Y2 are both C. Preferably, Y1 and Y2 are not both N.
Thus, Z1 and Z3 may each be independently selected from O, S, S(O), NR5and CR4; Z2 is independently selected from O, S, S(O), NR5, CR4 and C=W; wherein W is selected from O, S or NR6; with the proviso that if Z2 is not C=W, then the ring formed by Y1 , Y2, Z1 , Z2, Z3 contains two endocyclic double bonds and if Z2 is C=W, the bond between Y1 and Y2 (which may both be C) is a double bond; and with the further proviso that at least one of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is O, S or NR5.
It may be that Z2 is C=W, e.g. C=0. Where Z2 is C=W, e.g. C=0 it is typically the case that Y1 and Y2 are both C. Thus the compound may be a compound of one or more of formulae (XIV), (XV), (XVI), (XVII), (XVIII) or (XXXXXVII), e.g. a compound of formula (XIV), (XV), (XVI), (XVII), (XVIII) or (XXXXXVII) in which W is O. Compounds in which Z2 is C=W, e.g. C=0 may find particular use in the treatment of mastitis in domestic animals, e.g. by direct application (either topical or by injection) to the udder of a subject.
It may be that Z1, Z2 and Z3 are each independently selected from O, S, NR5 and CR4. Thus, it may be that Y1 and Y2 are each independently selected from C and N; Z1, Z2 and Z3 are each independently selected from O, S, NR5 and CR4; with the proviso that the ring formed by Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 contains two endocyclic double bonds; and with the further proviso that at least one of Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 is O, S, N or NR5.
It may be that Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 together form an imidazole, triazole, tetrazole, pyrazole or pyrrole ring. It may be that one of Y1 and Y2 is N and the other is C. Thus, it may be that Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 together form an imidazole, triazole, tetrazole, pyrazole or pyrrole ring in which a single one of Y1 and Y2 is N. It may be that Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 together form an triazole or tetrazole. It may be that one of Y1 and Y2 is N and the other is C. Thus, it may be that Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 together form a triazole or tetrazole ring in which a single one of Y1 and Y2 is N. It may be that Y1 is N. It may be that Y2 is N .
It may be that Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 together form a thiophene, furan, or pyrrole ring. Thus, it may be that a single one of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is independently selected from O, S and NR5 and the remaining two of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 are each CR4.
It may be that Z1 , Z2 , Z3, Y1 and Y2 together form a pyrazole, oxazole, imidazole, thiazole, isoxazole or isothiazole ring. Thus, it may be that a single one of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is independently CR4 and the remaining two of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 are selected from O, S and NR5.
It may be that Z1 , Z2 , Z3, Y1 and Y2 together form a oxazole, thiazole, isoxazole, furan, thiophene or isothiazole ring. Thus, it may be that both Y1 and Y2 are C and Z1 , Z2 and Z3 are selected from CR4, O, S and N, wherein if one of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 are N, that N must form part of a C=N endocyclic double bond.
It may be that Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 together form a oxazole, thiazole, isoxazole or isothiazole ring. Thus, it may be that both Y1 and Y2 are C and Z1 , Z2 and Z3 are selected from CR4, O, S and N; wherein a single one of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is N and that N must form part of a C=N endocyclic double bond; and wherein a single one of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is CR4. For the absence of doubt, the remaining Z1 , Z2 or Z3 is selected from O and S. It may be that the remaining Z1 , Z- or Z- is O. Thus it may be that Z1 , Z2 , Z3, Y1 and Y2 together form a oxazole or isoxazole ring. In these embodiments, it may be that a single one of X1 , X2, X3 and X4 is N, e.g. it may be that X1 is N. The remainder of X1 , X2, X3 and X4 (e.g. X2, X3 and X4) may be CR4.
In certain preferred embodiments, Y1 and Y2 are each C; Z1 is CR4 (e.g. CH); Z2 is selected from O, S and N R5; and Z3 is N. For the absence of doubt, the two endocyclic double bonds are situated between Z1 and Y1 and between Z3 and Y2. It may be that Z2 is selected from O and S. It may be that Z2 is O. In these embodiments, it may be that a single one of X1 , X2, X3 and X4 is N, e.g. it may be that X1 is N. The remainder of X1 , X2, X3 and X4 (e.g. X2, X3 and X4) may be CR4.
Preferably, R3 is selected from H and C1-C4-alkyl. Thus, R3 may be selected from H and methyl. R4 may be independently at each occurrence selected from: H, halo, nitro, cyano, SOR6, SO3R6, SO2R6, SO2NR6R6 CO2R6 C(O)R6, CONR6R6, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkynyl, C2-C4- alkenyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl. R4 may be independently at each occurrence selected from: halo, nitro, cyano, SOR6, SO3R6, SO2R6, SO2NR6R6 CO2R6 C(O)R6, CONR6R6, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkynyl, C2-C4-alkenyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl. R4 may be independently at each occurrence selected from: H, halo, nitro, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl, C1-C4- haloalkyl. R4 may be independently at each occurrence selected from: halo, nitro, C1-C4- alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl, C1-C4-haloalkyl. R4 may be independently at each occurrence selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl, C1-C4-haloalkyl. R4 may at all occurrences be H.
It may be that any R4 group which forms part of Z1 , Z2 or Z3 is an R4b group, wherein R4b is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, halo, nitro, cyano, C2-alkynyl, CO2H, C(O)H, and CONH2. Thus, R4b may be at each occurrence independently selected from: H, halo, nitro, cyano, C2-alkynyl. R4b may be at each occurrence independently selected from: H and halo. R4b may at all occurrences be H.
Where R5 is attached to a nitrogen which forms a double bond to a neighbouring atom in the ring formed by Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2, R5 is absent. Where R5 is attached to a nitrogen which forms only single bonds to the neighbouring atoms in the ring formed by Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2, R5 is not absent. R5 may be H. Alternatively, R5 may be C1-C4-alkyl, e.g. methyl.
It may be that at any specific occurrence R6 is H. It may be that at all occurrences R6 is H.
R7 may be a monocyclic aryl group. Thus, R7 may be a phenyl group. Said phenyl group may be unsubstituted or it may be substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents which are each independently at each occurrence selected from the group consisting of: halo, nitro, cyano, NRaRa, NRaS(O)2Ra, NRaCONRaRa, NRaCO2Ra, NRaC(O)Ra, ORa; SRa, SORa, SO3Ra, SO2Ra, SO2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl, C1- C4-haloalkyl, and CRaRaNRaRa. R7 may be a phenyl group which is substituted by 1 to 3 substituents independently at each occurrence selected from F, nitro, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4- alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl.
.Exemplary R7 groups include 2,5-difluorophen-1-yl and 3-nitro-4-methylphen-1-yl. Preferably, R7 is a bicyclic carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system in which at least one of the two rings is aromatic or heteroaromatic. Thus, R7 may take the form:
Figure imgf000022_0001
wherein V1 , V2 and V3 are each independently selected from: N and CR4; with the proviso that no more than two of V1 , V2 and V3 are N; and wherein the ring B is a substituted or unsubstituted 5- or 6- membered saturated cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl ring.
Preferably, R7 takes the form:
Figure imgf000022_0002
wherein V4 and V5 are each independently selected from O, S and NRa; R14 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, fluoro, cyano, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl; or any two R14 groups which are attached to the same carbon together form a group selected from: =0, =S, =NRa and =NORa; and m is an integer selected from 1 and 2. For the absence of doubt, V1 , V2, V3, V4, V5, R14 and m are selected such that the number of substituent groups off the R7 bicycle does not exceed 5.
It may be that V1 , V2 and V3 are each independently selected from: N and CH; with the proviso that no more than two of V1 , V2 and V3 are N. It may be that a single one of V1 , V2 and V3 is N. Preferably, V3 is CR4 (e.g. CH). Thus, it may be that V1 is N and V2 is CR4 (e.g. CH). Alternatively, it may be that V2 is N and V1 is CR4 (e.g. CH). In a further alternative, it may be that V1 and V2 are each N. R14 may be independently at each occurrence selected from: H, fluoro, cyano, C02Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl; or any two R14 groups which are attached to the same carbon together form a group selected from: =0, =S, =NRa and =NORa. Preferably R14 is independently at each occurrence selected from H, F, C1-C4-alkyl or C1-C4-haloalkyl; or any two R14 groups which are attached to the same carbon together form a =0 group. Preferably R14 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl or C1-C4-haloalkyl; or any two R14 groups which are attached to the same carbon together form a =0 group.
In a preferred embodiment, V4 is O. Thus, it may be that both V4 and V5 are O. It may be that V4 is O and V5 is S. It may be that V4 is O and V5 is NRa (e.g. NH).
V4 can also be S. Thus, it may be that V4 is S and V5 is NRa (e.g. NH).
It may be that V5 is NRa (e.g. NH). In this case it is preferable that the -CR14R14- group attached to said V5 is C=0. m may be 1. Preferably, m is 2.
In a specific embodiment, V4 is O, V5 is O, m is 2 and R14 is in all instances H. In another specific embodiment, V4 is O, V5 is S, m is 2 and R14 is in all instances H. In yet another specific embodiment, V4 is O, V5 is NH, m is 2, the -CR14R14- group attached to V5 is C=0 and the -CR14R14- group attached to V4 is CH2.
.Exemplary R7 groups include:
Figure imgf000023_0001
R7 may also take the form
Figure imgf000024_0001
, wherein V6 is independently selected from N and CR4 (e.g. CH); V7 is independently selected from NRa, S and O; and R15 is independently at each occurrence selected from: halo, nitro, cyano, NRaRa, NRaS(O)2Ra, NRaC(O)Ra, NRaCONRaRa, NRaCO2Ra, NRaC(O)Ra, ORa; SRa, SORa, SO3Ra, SO2Ra, SO2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl, C1-C4-haloalkyl, and CRaRaNRaRa. R15 may be independently at each occurrence selected from F, CN, ORa, nitro, C1-C4-alkyl, C2- C4-alkenyl, C^C^-alkynyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl. This form of R7 is particularly preferred where L3 is absent. For the absence of doubt, V6, V7, and R15 are selected such that the number of substituent groups off the R7 bicycle does not exceed 5.
Figure imgf000024_0002
An exemplary R7 group is
Figure imgf000024_0003
Preferably, R8 is selected from H or C1-C4-alkyl. Even more preferably, R8 is H. Preferably, R9 is at all occurrences H.
It may be that R10 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, OR6, CO2R6 and NR6R11. It may be that R10 is independently selected from OR6 and NR6R11. Preferably, R10 is independently selected from OH and NH2.
At any given occurrence, it may be that R11 is selected from H and C1-C4-alkyl. Preferably, R11 is at each occurrence selected from H and C1-C4-alkyl. Thus, at any specific occurrence R11 may be H. Alternatively, at any specific occurrence R11 may be C1-C4-alkyl, e.g. methyl. It may be that at all occurrences, R11 is H.
Where present, W is preferably O. The compound may be any one or more compound(s) selected from those tested in
.Examples 24 and/or 25 below, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or N-oxide thereof. Thus, the compound may be any one or more compound(s) selected from:
5- {2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmettiyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethylM
[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one A;
6- ({[1-(2-{4-oxo-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-5-yl}ethyl)piperidin-4-yl]amino}methyl)- 3,4-dihydro-2H-1 ,4-benzoxazin-3-one B;
5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-7-methoxy- 4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one C;
5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-7-fluoro- 4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one D;
7- methoxy-5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin- 1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one E;
7-fluoro-5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1- yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one F;
5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)- 4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one G;
Example 8 - 5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}- 4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one H;
7-fluoro-5-{2-[4-({2H,3H,4H-pyrano[2,3-c]pyridin-6-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}- 4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one I;
7-methoxy-5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin- 1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one J;
7-fluoro-5-(2-{4-[({7-oxo-6H,7H,8H-pyrimido[5,4-b][1 ,4]oxazin-2-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1- yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one K;
7-fluoro-5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1- yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one L;
5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-7-fluoro- 4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one M ; 5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}am
4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one N;
5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}m^
4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]1 ,5-naphthyridin-6-one O;
5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1 -yl}ethyl}-5H,6H- [1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]1 ,5-naphthyridin-6-one P;
5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)^ 4H,5H-[1 ,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]quinoxalin-4-one Q;
5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)- 4H,5H-[1 ,2,3,4]tetrazolo[1 ,5-a]quinoxalin-4-one R;
5- {2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1 -yl}ethyl}-4H,5H- [1 ,2,3,4]tetrazolo[1 ,5-a]quinoxalin-4-one S;
6- (2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)- 5H,6H-[1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5-c]quinazolin-5-one T;
6-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1 -yl}ethyl}-5H,6H- [1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5-c]quinoxalin-5-one U;
8-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)- 3,5,6,8, 10-pentaazatricyclo[7.4.0.0 2'6]trideca-1 (9),2,4, 10.12-pentaen-7-one V; and
5-{2-hydroxy-2-[trans-4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6- yl}methyl)amino]cyclohexyl]ethyl}-7-methoxy-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one W; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or N-oxide thereof
Where the compound of the invention is an N-oxide, it will typically be a pyridine N-oxide, i.e. where the compound of the invention comprises a pyridine ring (which may form part of a bicyclic or tricyclic ring system), the nitrogen of that pyridine may be N+-0". Alternatively, it may be that the compound of the invention is not an N-oxide.
The compound may be a compound of formula (la), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
Figure imgf000027_0001
wherein R1 is selected from R2 or R3; R2 represents the group:
Figure imgf000027_0002
are each independently selected from: N and CR4; X4 is selected from N, CR2 and CR4; wherein only one of R1 and X4 contains the group R2; and wherein no more than two of X1, X2, X3 and X4 are N; Y1 and Y2 are each independently selected from C and N; Z1, Z2 and Z3 are each independently selected from O, S, S(O), NR5, CR4 and C=W; wherein W is selected from O, S or NR6; wherein when none of Z1, Z2 and Z3 is C=W, then the ring formed by Z1, Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 contains two endocyclic double bonds, and when one of Z1, Z2 and Z3 is C=W, then the ring formed by Z1, Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 contains a single endocyclic double bond; and wherein at least one of Z1, Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 is O, S, N or NR5; =A is independently selected from: =0, =S, =NR6 and =NOR6; L1 is a linker group having the form -(CR9R9)rU1-U2-(CR9R9)s-U3-(CR9R10)r; wherein U1, U2 and U3 are each independently selected from: a bond, CO, O, S and NR11; wherein r, s, and t are each independently an integer selected from 0, 1 , 2 and 3 and wherein definitions of r, s, t, U1 , U2 and U3 are chosen such that the total length of the linker group is 1 , 2, 3 or 4 atoms; L2 is a saturated monocyclic 4-, 5-, 6- or 7- membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclic ring; L3 is absent or is -N(R8)L4-; L4 is independently selected from -CR9R9- and a 3-, 4- or 5- membered cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl ring; R3 and R11 are each independently at each occurrence selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-haloalkyl, S(O)2-C1-C4-alkyl and C(O)-C1-C4-alkyl; R4 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, halo, nitro, cyano, NR6R11 , NR6S(O)2R6, NR6CONR6R6, NR6C(O)R6, NR6CO2R6, OR6; O-aryl, SR6, SOR6, SO3R6, SO2R6, SO2NR6R6, CO2R6, C(O)R6, CONR6R6, aryl, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl and C1-C4- haloalkyl; R5 is absent or is independently selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, and C1-C4-haloalkyl; R6 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, and C1-C4-haloalkyl; R7 is a monocyclic aromatic or heteroaromatic ring or R7 is a bicyclic carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system in which at least one of the two rings is aromatic or heteroaromatic; R8 is independently selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-haloalkyl, S(O)2-C1-C4-alkyl and C(O)-C1-C4-alkyl; or L2 and R8 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached together form a saturated 5-, 6- or 7- membered monocyclic heterocycloalkyl ring or a saturated 7-, 8- or 9- membered bicyclic heterocycloalkyl ring system; R9 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, Me, CF3 and F; R10 is independently at each occurrence selected from: R9, OR6, CO2R6 and NR11 R11 ; wherein each of the aforementioned alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, carbocyclic, halocycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl (e.g. phenyl) and heteroaryl groups and aromatic and heteroaromatic rings is optionally substituted, where chemically possible, by 1 to 5 substituents which are each independently at each occurrence selected from the group consisting of: oxo, =NRa, =NORa, halo, nitro, cyano, NRaRa, NRaS(O)2Ra, NRaC(O)Ra, NRaCONRaRa, NRaCO2Ra, ORa; SRa, SORa, SO3Ra, SO2Ra, SO2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, CRbRbNRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4- alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl; wherein Ra is independently at each occurrence selected from H, C1-C4-alkyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl; and Rb is independently at each occurrence selected from H, halogen, C1-C4-alkyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl.
The compound may be a compound of formula (lb), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or N-oxide thereof:
Figure imgf000028_0001
Figure imgf000028_0002
independently selected from: N, C=0 and CR4; X4 is selected from N, NR2, NR3, CR2 and CR4; wherein only one of R1 and X4 comprises the group R2; and wherein no more than two of X1 , X2, X3 and X4 are N; the bond between X3 and X4 is a single bond or a double bond; wherein when X4 is NR2 or NR3, the bond between X3 and X4 is a single bond and X3 is C=0; and when X4 is selected from N, CR2 and CR4 the bond between X3 and X4 is a double bond and X3 is selected from N and CR4; Y1 and Y2 are each independently selected from C and N; Z1, Z2 and Z3 are each independently selected from O, S, S(O), NR5, CR4 and C=W; wherein W is selected from O, S or NR6; wherein when none of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is C=W, then the ring formed by Z1 , Z2 , Z3, Y1 and Y2 contains two endocyclic double bonds, and when one of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is C=W, then the ring formed by Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 contains a single endocyclic double bond; and wherein at least one of Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 is O, S, N or NR5; =A is independently selected from: =0, =S, =NR6 and =NOR6; L1 is a linker group having the form -(CR9R9)rU1-U2-(CR9R9)s-U3-(CR9R10)r; wherein U1 , U2 and U3 are each independently selected from: a bond, CO, O, S and NR11 ; wherein r, s, and t are each independently an integer selected from 0, 1 , 2 and 3 and wherein definitions of r, s, t, U1 , U2 and U3 are chosen such that the total length of the linker group is 1 , 2, 3 or 4 atoms; L2 is a saturated monocyclic 4-, 5-, 6- or 7- membered cycloalkyl or heterocyclic ring; L3 is absent or is -N(R8)L4-; L4 is independently selected from -CR9R9- and a 3-, 4- or 5- membered cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl ring; R3 and R11 are each independently at each occurrence selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-haloalkyl, S(O)2-C1-C4 alkyl and C(O)-C1-C4-alkyl; R4 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, halo, nitro, cyano, NR6R11 , NR6S(O)2R6, NR6CONR6R6, NR6C(O)R6, NR6CO2R6, OR6; O-aryl, SR6, SOR6, SO3R6, SO2R6, SO2NR6R6 CO2R6, C(O)R6, CONR6R6, aryl, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl and C1-C4- haloalkyl; R5 is absent or is independently selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, and C1-C4- haloalkyl; R6 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, and C1-C4- haloalkyl; R7 is a monocyclic aromatic or heteroaromatic ring or R7 is a bicyclic carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system in which at least one of the two rings is aromatic or heteroaromatic; R8 is independently selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-haloalkyl, S(O)2- C1-C4-alkyl and C(O)-C1-C4-alkyl; or L2 and R8 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached together form a saturated 5-, 6- or 7- membered monocyclic heterocycloalkyl ring or a saturated 7-, 8- or 9- membered bicyclic heterocycloalkyl ring system; R9 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, Me, CF3 and F; R10 is independently at each occurrence selected from: R9, OR6, CO2R6 and NR11 R11 ; wherein each of the aforementioned alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, carbocyclic, halocycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl (e.g. phenyl) and heteroaryl groups and aromatic and heteroaromatic rings is optionally substituted, where chemically possible, by 1 to 5 substituents which are each independently at each occurrence selected from the group consisting of: oxo, =NRa, =NORa, halo, nitro, cyano, NRaRa, NRaS(O)2Ra, NRaC(O)Ra, NRaCONRaRa, NRaCO2Ra, ORa; SRa, SORa, SO3Ra, SO2Ra, SO2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, CRbRbNRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C^-CU-alkenyl, C^-CU-alkynyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl; wherein Ra is independently at each occurrence selected from H, C1-C4 alkyl and C1-C4 haloalkyl; and Rb is independently at each occurrence selected from H, halogen, C1-C4 alkyl and C1-C4 haloalkyl.
Included within the scope of the present invention are all stereoisomers, geometric isomers and tautomeric forms of the compounds of the invention, including compounds exhibiting more than one type of isomerism, and mixtures of one or more thereof. Also included are acid addition or base salts wherein the counter ion is optically active, for example, d-lactate or I- lysine, or racemic, for example, dl-tartrate or dl-arginine.
Compounds of the invention containing one or more asymmetric carbon atoms can exist as two or more stereoisomers. Where a compound of the invention contains a double bond such as a C=C or C=N group, geometric cis/trans (or Z/E) isomers are possible. Specifically, the oxime groups present in certain compounds of the invention may be present as the E-oxime, as the Z-oxime or as a mixture of both in any proportion. Cis/trans isomers may be separated by conventional techniques well known to those skilled in the art, for example, chromatography and fractional crystallisation.
Where structurally isomeric forms of a compound are interconvertible via a low energy barrier, tautomeric isomerism ('tautomerism') can occur. This can take the form of proton tautomerism in compounds of the invention containing, for example, an imino, keto, or oxime group, or so- called valence tautomerism in compounds which contain an aromatic moiety.
Conventional techniques for the preparation/isolation of individual enantiomers when necessary include chiral synthesis from a suitable optically pure precursor or resolution of the racemate (or the racemate of a salt or derivative) using, for example, chiral high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC).
Alternatively, the racemate (or a racemic precursor) may be reacted with a suitable optically active compound, for example, an alcohol, or, in the case where the compound of the invention contains an acidic or basic moiety, a base or acid such as 1-phenylethylamine or tartaric acid. The resulting diastereomeric mixture may be separated by chromatography and/or fractional crystallization and one or both of the diastereoisomers converted into the corresponding pure enantiomer(s) by means well known to a skilled person.
Chiral compounds of the invention (and chiral precursors thereof) may be obtained in enantiomerically-enriched form using chromatography, typically HPLC, on an asymmetric resin with a mobile phase consisting of a hydrocarbon, typically heptane or hexane, containing from 0 to 50% by volume of isopropanol, typically from 2% to 20%, and from 0 to 5% by volume of an alkylamine, typically 0.1 % diethylamine. Concentration of the eluate affords the enriched mixture.
When any racemate crystallises, crystals of two different types are possible. The first type is the racemic compound (true racemate) referred to above wherein one homogeneous form of crystal is produced containing both enantiomers in equimolar amounts. The second type is the racemic mixture or conglomerate wherein two forms of crystal are produced in equimolar amounts each comprising a single enantiomer. While both of the crystal forms present in a racemic mixture have identical physical properties, they may have different physical properties compared to the true racemate. Racemic mixtures may be separated by conventional techniques known to those skilled in the art - see, for example, "Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds" by E. L. Eliel and S. H. Wilen (Wiley, 1994).
It follows that a single compound may exhibit more than one type of isomerism. The term Cm-Cn refers to a group with m to n carbon atoms.
The term "alkyl" refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbon chain. For example, C1-C6-alkyl may refer to methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, /'so-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl and n- hexyl. The alkyl groups may be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents. Specific substituents for each alkyl group independently may be fluorine, ORa or NHRa.
The term "haloalkyl" refers to a hydrocarbon chain substituted with at least one halogen atom independently chosen at each occurrence from: fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine. The halogen atom may be present at any position on the hydrocarbon chain. For example, C1-C6-haloalkyl may refer to chloromethyl, fluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, chloroethyl e.g. 1- chloromethyl and 2-chloroethyl, trichloroethyl e.g. 1 ,2,2-trichloroethyl, 2,2,2-trichloroethyl, fluoroethyl e.g. 1 -fluoromethyl and 2-fluoroethyl, trifluoroethyl e.g. 1 ,2,2-trifluoroethyl and 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, chloropropyl, trichloropropyl, fluoropropyl, trifluoropropyl. A halo alkyl group may be a fluoroalkyl group, i.e. a hydrocarbon chain substituted with at least one halogen atom.
The term "alkenyl" refers to a branched or linear hydrocarbon chain containing at least one double bond. The double bond(s) may be present as the E or Z isomer. The double bond may be at any possible position of the hydrocarbon chain. For example, "C2-C6-alkenyl" may refer to ethenyl, propenyl, butenyl, butadienyl, pentenyl, pentadienyl, hexenyl and hexadienyl. The alkenyl groups may be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents. Specific substituents for any saturated carbon atom in each alkenyl group independently may be fluorine, ORa or NHRa.
The term "alkynyl" refers to a branched or linear hydrocarbon chain containing at least one triple bond. The triple bond may be at any possible position of the hydrocarbon chain. For example, "C2-C6-alkynyl" may refer to ethynyl, propynyl, butynyl, pentynyl and hexynyl. The alkynyl groups may be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents. Specific substituents for any saturated carbon atom in each alkynyl group independently may be fluorine, ORa or NHRa.
The term "cycloalkyl" refers to a saturated hydrocarbon ring system containing 3, 4, 5 or 6 carbon atoms. For example, "C3-C6-cycloalkyl" may refer to cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl. The cycloalkyl groups may be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents. Specific substituents for each cycloalkyl group independently may be fluorine, ORa or NHRa.
The term "aromatic" when applied to a substituent as a whole means a single ring or polycyclic ring system with 4n + 2 electrons in a conjugated π system within the ring or ring system where all atoms contributing to the conjugated π system are in the same plane.
The term "heteroaromatic" when applied to a substituent as a whole means a single ring or polycyclic ring system with 4n + 2 electrons in a conjugated π system within the ring or ring system where all atoms contributing to the conjugated π system are in the same plane, the ring system comprising from 1 to 4 heteroatoms independently selected from O, S and N (in other words from 1 to 4 of the atoms forming the ring or ring system are selected from O, S and N).
The term "aryl" refers to an aromatic hydrocarbon ring system. The ring system has 4n +2 electrons in a conjugated π system within a ring where all atoms contributing to the conjugated π system are in the same plane. For example, the "aryl" may be phenyl and naphthyl. The aryl group may be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents. Specific substituents for each aryl group independently may be C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-haloalkyl, cyano, halogen, ORa or NHRa.
Aryl groups may have from 6 to 20 carbon atoms as appropriate to satisfy valency requirements. Aryl groups comprise aromatic rings, i.e. rings which satisfy the Huckel rule. Aryl groups may be optionally substituted phenyl groups, optionally substituted biphenyl groups, optionally substituted naphthalenyl groups or optionally substituted anthracenyl groups. Equally, aryl groups may include non-aromatic carbocyclic portions. An aromatic ring is a phenyl ring.
The term "heteroaryl" may refer to any aromatic (i.e. a ring system containing (4n + 2) ττ- electrons or n- electrons in the ττ-system) 5-10 membered ring system comprising from 1 to 4 heteroatoms independently selected from O, S and N (in other words from 1 to 4 of the atoms forming the ring system are selected from O, S and N). Thus, any heteroaryl groups may be independently selected from: 5 membered heteroaryl groups in which the heteroaromatic ring is substituted with 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from O, S and N; and 6-membered heteroaryl groups in which the heteroaromatic ring is substituted with 1-3 (e.g.1-2) nitrogen atoms; 9-membered bicyclic heteroaryl groups in which the heteroaromatic system is substituted with 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from O, S and N; 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl groups in which the heteroaromatic system is substituted with 1-4 nitrogen atoms. Specifically, heteroaryl groups may be independently selected from: pyrrole, furan, thiophene, pyrazole, imidazole, oxazole, isoxazole, triazole, oxadiazole, thiadiazole, tetrazole; pyridine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, triazine, indole, isoindole, benzofuran, isobenzofuran, benzothiophene, indazole, benzimidazole, benzoxazole, benzthiazole, benzisoxazole, purine, quinoline, isoquinoline, cinnoline, quinazoline, quinoxaline, pteridine, phthalazine, naphthyridine. Heteroaryl groups may also be 6-membered heteroaryl groups in which the heteroaromatic ring is substituted with 1 heteroatomic group independently selected from O, S and NH and the ring also comprises a carbonyl group. Such groups include pyridones and pyranones. The heteroaryl system itself may be substituted with other groups. The heteroaryl group may be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents. Specific substituents for each heteroaryl group independently may be C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-haloalkyl, cyano, halogen, ORa or NHRa.
Heteroaryl groups may mean a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl group. They may therefore comprise a 5- or 6- membered heteroaromatic ring, i.e. a 5- or 6- membered ring which satisfies the Huckel rule and comprises a heteroatom. Heteroaryl groups may be selected from: 5-membered heteroaryl groups in which the heteroaromatic ring is includes 1-4 heteroatoms selected from O, S and N; and 6-membered heteroaryl groups in which the heteroaromatic ring includes 1-2 nitrogen atoms. Specifically, heteroaryl groups and heteroaromatic rings may be selected from: pyrrole, furan, thiophene, pyrazole, imidazole, oxazole, isoxazole, triazole, oxadiazole, thiodiazole, pyridine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, pyrazine.
The term "y-membered heterocycloalkyl" may refer to a y-membered monocyclic or bicyclic saturated or partially saturated groups comprising 1 or 2 heteroatoms independently selected from O, S and N in the ring system (in other words 1 or 2 of the atoms forming the ring system are selected from O, S and N). By partially saturated it is meant that the ring may comprise one or two double bonds. This applies particularly to monocyclic rings with from 5 to 8 members. The double bond will typically be between two carbon atoms but may be between a carbon atom and a nitrogen atom. .Examples of heterocycloalkyl groups include; piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, pyrrolidine, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, dihydrofuran, tetrahydropyran, dihydropyran, dioxane, azepine. Bicyclic systems may be spiro-fused, i.e. where the rings are linked to each other through a single carbon atom; vicinally fused, i.e. where the rings are linked to each other through two adjacent carbon or nitrogen atoms; or they may be share a bridgehead, i.e. the rings are linked to each other two non-adjacent carbon or nitrogen atoms. The heterocycloalkyl groups may be unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents. Specific substituents for any saturated carbon atom in each heterocycloalkyl group may independently be fluorine, ORa or N H Ra.
An 'endocyclic' double bond is one where both of the atoms between which the double bond is formed are in the ring or ring system in which the atoms are situated.
A carbocyclic group consists of one or more rings which are entirely formed from carbon atoms. A carbocylic group can be a mono- or bicyclic cycloalkyl group, or it can comprise at least one phenyl ring.
A heterocyclic group consists of one or more rings wherein the ring system includes at least one heteroatom. A heterocyclic group comprises at least one heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl rings. A heterocycloalkyl ring may be a saturated ring comprising at least one heteroatom selected from O, S and N .
Where a ring system is described as being a x-membered bicyclic group, that is intended to mean that the skeleton of the bicyclic ring system is formed from x atoms (i.e. the total number of atoms across the two rings of the bicycle is x).
Aryl and heteroaryl groups are optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents which are each independently at each occurrence selected from the group consisting of: halo, nitro, cyano, N RaRa, N RaS(O)2Ra, NRaCON RaRa, NRaCO2Ra, NRaC(O)Ra, ORa; SRa, SORa, SO3Ra, SO2Ra, SO2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CON RaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl, C1- C4-haloalkyl and CRaRaN RaRa; wherein Ra is independently at each occurrence selected from H , C1-C4-alkyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl.
The present invention also includes the synthesis of all pharmaceutically acceptable isotopically-labelled compounds of formulae (I) to (XXXXXXI) wherein one or more atoms are replaced by atoms having the same atomic number, but an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number most commonly found in nature.
.Examples of isotopes suitable for inclusion in the compounds of the invention include isotopes of hydrogen, such as 2H and 3H , carbon, such as 1 1 C, 13C and 14C, chlorine, such as 36CI, fluorine, such as 18F, iodine, such as 123l and 125l, nitrogen, such as 13N and 15N, oxygen, such as 15O, 17O and 18O, phosphorus, such as 32P, and sulphur, such as 35S.
Certain isotopically-labelled compounds, for example, those incorporating a radioactive isotope, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distribution studies. The radioactive isotopes tritium, i.e. 3H, and carbon-14, i.e. 14C, are particularly useful for this purpose in view of their ease of incorporation and ready means of detection.
Substitution with heavier isotopes such as deuterium, i.e. 2H, may afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example, increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements, and hence may be preferred in some circumstances.
Substitution with positron emitting isotopes, such as 11C, 18F, 15O and 13N, can be useful in Positron Emission Topography (PET) studies for examining substrate receptor occupancy.
Isotopically-labelled compounds can generally be prepared by conventional techniques known to those skilled in the art or by processes analogous to those described using an appropriate isotopically-labelled reagent in place of the non-labelled reagent previously employed.
Uses, methods of treatment and pharmaceutical formulations
Each of the compounds of the present invention may be used as a medicament. Thus, in another aspect of the invention, there is provided compound as defined above for the treatment of bacterial infections.
The compounds and formulations of the present invention may be used in the treatment of a wide range of bacterial infections. In some embodiments, the compounds can be used to treat bacterial infections caused by one or more resistant strains of bacteria e.g a strain which is resistant to at least one approved antibiotic drug. In a further embodiment, the compounds can be used to treat bacterial infections caused by one or more resistant strains of Gram-positive bacteria e.g a strain which is resistant to at least one approved antibiotic drug. In a further embodiment, the compounds can be used to treat bacterial infections caused by one or more resistant strains of Gram-negative bacteria, e.g a strain which is resistant to at least one approved antibiotic drug. The compounds and formulations of the invention may be used to treat infections caused by bacteria which are in the form of a biofilm.
The term 'resistant strains' is intended to mean strains of bacteria which have shown resistance to one or more known antibacterial drug. For example, it may refer to strains which are resistant to methicillin, strains that are resistant to one or more other β-lactam antibiotics, strains that are resistant to one or more fluoroquinolones and/or strains that are resistant to one or more other antibiotics (i.e. antibiotics other than β-lactams and fluoroquinolones). A resistant strain is one in which the MIC of a given compound or class of compounds for that strain has shifted to a significantly higher number than for the parent (susceptible) strain.
The term 'approved drug' is intended to mean that the drug is one which had been approved by the US FDA or the EMA prior to 1 August 2014.
The bacterial strain (e.g. the MRSA strain or E. Coli strain) may be resistant to one or more fluoroquinolone antibiotics, e.g. one or more antibiotics selected from levofloxacin, enoxacin, fleroxacin, lomefloxacin, nadifloxacin, norfloxacin, rufloxacin, balofloxacin, grepafloxacin, pazufloxacin, sparfloxacin, temafloxacin, tosufloxacin, besifloxacin, clinafloxacin, garenoxacin, gemifloxacin, gatifloxacin, sitafloxacin, trovafloxacin, prulifloxacin, ciprofloxacin, pefloxacin, moxifloxacin, ofloxacin, delafloxacin, zabofloxacin, avarofloxacin, finafloxacin.
The compounds of the invention may be particularly effective at treating infections caused by Gram-positive bacteria. The compounds of the invention may be particularly effective at treating infections caused by Gram-positive bacteria which are resistant to one or more fluoroquinolone antibiotics.
The compounds of the invention may be particularly effective at treating infections caused by Gram negative bacteria. The compounds of the invention may be particularly effective at treating infections caused by Gram-negative bacteria which are resistant to one or more fluoroquinolone antibiotics.
The compounds of the invention may be particularly effective at treating infections caused by aerobic bacteria, e.g. S. Aureus. The compounds of the invention may be particularly effective at treating infections caused by anaerobic bacteria, e.g. a Clostridium spp such as Clostridium difficile.
The compounds and formulations of the present invention can be used to treat or to prevent infections caused by bacterial strains associated with biowarfare. These may be strains which are category A pathogens as identified by the US government (e.g. those which cause anthrax, plague etc.) and/or they may be strains which are category B pathogens as identified by the US government (e.g. those which cause Glanders disease, mellioidosis etc). In a specific embodiment, the compounds and formulations of the present invention can be used to treat or to prevent infections caused by Gram-positive bacterial strains associated with biowarfare (e.g. anthrax). More particularly, the compounds and formulations may be used to treat category A and/or category B pathogens as defined by the US government on 1st Jan 2014.
[0001] The bacterial infection may be caused by a strain selected from: Neisseria spp., Haemophilus spp., Legionella spp., Pasteurella spp., Bordetella spp., Brucella spp., Francisella spp. and Moraxella spp. Like Neisseria spp., Haemophilus spp., Legionella spp., Pasteurella spp., Bordetella spp., Brucella spp., Francisella spp. and Moraxella spp. are fastidious Gram-negative organisms. A fastidious bacterium is one having a complex nutritional requirement, i.e. one which will only grow when specific nutrients are included in the culture medium. As an example Neisseria gonorrhoeae requires, amongst other supplements, iron, several amino acids, cofactors and vitamins in order to grow. Members of the fastidious Gram-negative bacteria group often share common antibiotic susceptibility profiles. Pathogenic Neisseria species include Neisseria gonorrhoeae (the pathogen responsible for gonorrhoea) and Neisseria meningitidis (one of the pathogens responsible for bacterial meningitis). Infections which can be treated by the compounds and methods of the invention include gonorrhoea. Infections which can be treated include secondary infections which can arise from lack of treatment of a primary Neisseria gonorrhoeae infection. .Exemplary secondary infections include urethritis, dysuria, epididymitis, pelvic inflammatory disease, cervicitis and endometritis and also systemic gonococcal infections (e.g. those manifesting as arthritis, endocarditis or meningitis). The gonorrhoea infection may be one caused by a strain of Neisseria gonorrhoeae which is resistant to at least one known antibacterial drug, e.g. at least one β-lactam drug. The gonorrhoea infection may be one caused by a strain of Neisseria gonorrhoeae which is resistant to at least one approved drug. The at least one drug may be an antibiotic drug, e.g. one that is approved for use in treating one of the fastidious Gram negative species mentioned in this specification. It may be approved for use in treating gonorrhoea. The approved drug may be a β-lactam drug. Further infections which can be treated by the compounds and methods of the invention include bacterial meningitis and Neisseria meningitidis infections of other parts of the human or animal body.
The compounds of the invention can be used to treat or prevent mycobacterial infections, e.g. mycobacterial infections caused by resistant strains of mycobacteria. Thus, for example, they can be used to treat TB or leprosy. Thus, it may be that the mycobacterial infection is caused by M. tuberculosis. It may also be that the mycobacterial infection is caused by a mycobacterium selected from: M. avium complex, M. abscessus, M. leprae, M. bovis, M. kansasii, M. chelonae, M. africanum, M. canetti and M. microti. The compounds may be used to treat resistant strains of TB, e.g. MDR-TB (i.e. TB infections caused by strains which are resistant to isoniazid and rifampicin), XDR-TB (i.e. TB infections caused by strains which are resistant to isoniazid, rifampicin, at least one fluoroquinolone and at least one of kanamycin, capreomycin and amikacin) and/or TDR-TB (i.e. TB infections caused by strains which have proved resistant to every drug tested against it with the exception of a compound of the invention). The mycobacterium is caused by a mycobacterial strain which is resistant to at least one approved antimycobacterial compound. The at least one approved antimycobacterial compound may be selected from: rifampicin, isoniazid, kanamycin, capreomycin, amikacin and a fluoroquinolone. The at least one approved antimycobacterial compound may be selected from: rifampicin, moxifloxacin, isoniazid, ciprofloxacin and levofloxacin. The compounds of the invention may be used to treat non- replicating TB.
The compounds of the invention may also be useful in treating other forms of infectious disease, e.g. fungal infections, parasitic infections and/or viral infections.
The compounds of the present invention can be used in the treatment of the human body. They may be used in the treatment of the animal body. In particular, the compounds of the present invention can be used to treat commercial animals such as livestock. Alternatively, the compounds of the present invention can be used to treat companion animals such as cats, dogs, etc.
The compounds of the invention may be obtained, stored and/or administered in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt. Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, salts of pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic acids such as hydrochloric, sulphuric, phosphoric, nitric, carbonic, boric, sulfamic, and hydrobromic acids, or salts of pharmaceutically acceptable organic acids such as acetic, propionic, butyric, tartaric, maleic, hydroxymaleic, fumaric, malic, citric, lactic, mucic, gluconic, benzoic, succinic, oxalic, phenylacetic, methanesulphonic, toluenesulphonic, benzenesulphonic, salicylic, sulphanilic, aspartic, glutamic, edetic, stearic, palmitic, oleic, lauric, pantothenic, tannic, ascorbic and valeric acids. Suitable base salts are formed from bases which form non-toxic salts. .Examples include the aluminium, arginine, benzathine, calcium, choline, diethylamine, diolamine, glycine, lysine, magnesium, meglumine, olamine, potassium, sodium, tromethamine and zinc salts. Hemisalts of acids and bases may also be formed, for example, hemisulfate and hemicalcium salts. Also included are acid addition or base salts wherein the counter ion is optically active, for example, d-lactate or l-lysine, or racemic, for example, dl-tartrate or dl-arginine.
Compounds of the invention may exist in a single crystal form or in a mixture of crystal forms or they may be amorphous. Thus, compounds of the invention intended for pharmaceutical use may be administered as crystalline or amorphous products. They may be obtained, for example, as solid plugs, powders, or films by methods such as precipitation, crystallization, freeze drying, or spray drying, or evaporative drying. Microwave or radio frequency drying may be used for this purpose.
For the above-mentioned compounds of the invention the dosage administered will, of course, vary with the compound employed, the mode of administration, the treatment desired and the disorder indicated. For example, if the compound of the invention is administered orally, then the daily dosage of the compound of the invention may be in the range from 0.01 micrograms per kilogram body weight (μg/kg) to 100 milligrams per kilogram body weight (mg/kg).
A compound of the invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, may be used on their own but will generally be administered in the form of a pharmaceutical composition in which the compounds of the invention, or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, is in association with a pharmaceutically acceptable adjuvant, diluent or carrier. Conventional procedures for the selection and preparation of suitable pharmaceutical formulations are described in, for example, "Pharmaceuticals - The Science of Dosage Form Designs", M. E. Aulton, Churchill Livingstone, 1988.
The compounds of the invention may be administered in combination with other active compounds (e.g. antifungal compounds, oncology compounds) and, in particular, with other antibacterial compounds. The compound of the invention and the other active (e.g. the other antibacterial compound) may be administered in different pharmaceutical formulations either simultaneously or sequentially with the other active. Alternatively, the compound of the invention and the other active (e.g. the other antibacterial compound) may form part of the same pharmaceutical formulation.
.Examples of other bacterial compounds which could be administered with the compounds of the invention are penems, carbapenems, fluoroquinolones, β-lactams, vancomycin, erythromycin or any other known antibiotic drug molecule.
Depending on the mode of administration of the compounds of the invention, the pharmaceutical composition which is used to administer the compounds of the invention will preferably comprise from 0.05 to 99 %w (per cent by weight) compounds of the invention, more preferably from 0.05 to 80 %w compounds of the invention, still more preferably from 0.10 to 70 %w compounds of the invention, and even more preferably from 0.10 to 50 %w compounds of the invention, all percentages by weight being based on total composition.
The pharmaceutical compositions may be administered topically (e.g. to the skin) in the form, e.g., of creams, gels, lotions, solutions, suspensions, or systemically, e.g. by oral administration in the form of tablets, capsules, syrups, powders, suspensions, solutions or granules; or by parenteral administration in the form of a sterile solution, suspension or emulsion for injection (including intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravascular or infusion); or by rectal administration in the form of suppositories; or by inhalation (i.e. in the form of an aerosol or by nebulisation).
If administered topically, high-dosages of the compounds of the invention can be administered. Thus, a compound with an in vitro MIC of, for example, 16-64 μg/mL may still provide an effective treatment against certain bacterial infections.
For oral administration the compounds of the invention may be admixed with an adjuvant or a carrier, for example, lactose, saccharose, sorbitol, mannitol; a starch, for example, potato starch, corn starch or amylopectin; a cellulose derivative; a binder, for example, gelatine or polyvinylpyrrolidone; and/or a lubricant, for example, magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, polyethylene glycol, a wax, paraffin, and the like, and then compressed into tablets. If coated tablets are required, the cores, prepared as described above, may be coated with a concentrated sugar solution which may contain, for example, gum arabic, gelatine, talcum and titanium dioxide. Alternatively, the tablet may be coated with a suitable polymer dissolved in a readily volatile organic solvent.
For the preparation of soft gelatine capsules, the compounds of the invention may be admixed with, for example, a vegetable oil or polyethylene glycol. Hard gelatine capsules may contain granules of the compound using either the above-mentioned excipients for tablets. Also liquid or semisolid formulations of the compound of the invention may be filled into hard gelatine capsules. Liquid preparations for oral application may be in the form of syrups or suspensions, for example, solutions containing the compound of the invention, the balance being sugar and a mixture of ethanol, water, glycerol and propylene glycol. Optionally such liquid preparations may contain colouring agents, flavouring agents, sweetening agents (such as saccharine), preservative agents and/or carboxymethylcellulose as a thickening agent or other excipients known to those skilled in the art.
For intravenous (parenteral) administration the compounds of the invention may be administered as a sterile aqueous or oily solution.
The size of the dose for therapeutic purposes of compounds of the invention will naturally vary according to the nature and severity of the conditions, the age and sex of the animal or patient and the route of administration, according to well known principles of medicine.
Dosage levels, dose frequency, and treatment durations of compounds of the invention are expected to differ depending on the formulation and clinical indication, age, and co-morbid medical conditions of the patient. The standard duration of treatment with compounds of the invention is expected to vary between one and seven days for most clinical indications. It may be necessary to extend the duration of treatment beyond seven days in instances of recurrent infections or infections associated with tissues or implanted materials to which there is poor blood supply including bones/joints, respiratory tract, endocardium, and dental tissues.
In another aspect the present invention provides a pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compound of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient. The formulation may further comprise one or more other antibiotics, e.g. one or more fluoroquinolone antibiotics. Illustrative fluoroquinolone antibiotics include levofloxacin, enoxacin, fleroxacin, lomefloxacin, nadifloxacin, norfloxacin, rufloxacin, balofloxacin, grepafloxacin, pazufloxacin, sparfloxacin, temafloxacin, tosufloxacin, besifloxacin, clinafloxacin, garenoxacin, gemifloxacin, gatifloxacin, sitafloxacin, trovafloxacin, prulifloxacin, ciprofloxacin, pefloxacin, moxifloxacin, ofloxacin, delafloxacin, zabofloxacin, avarofloxacin, finafloxacin.
In another aspect of the invention is provided a method of treating a bacterial infection, the method comprising treating a subject in need thereof with a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention.
Medical uses The compounds of the present invention can be used in the treatment of the human body.
The compounds of the invention may be for use in treating human bacterial infections such as infections of the genitourinary system, the respiratory tract, the gastrointestinal tract, the ear, the skin, the throat, soft tissue, bone and joints (including infections caused by Staphylococcus aureus). The compounds can be used to treat pneumonia, sinusitis, acute bacterial sinusitis, bronchitis, acute bacterial exacerbation of chronic bronchitis, anthrax, chronic bacterial prostatitis, acute pyelonephritis, pharyngitis, tuberculosis, tonsillitis, Escherichia coli, prophylaxis before dental surgery, cellulitis, acnes, cystitis, infectious diarrhoea, typhoid fever, infections caused by anaerobic bacteria, peritonitis, abdominal infection, bacteraemia, septicaemia, sexually transmitted bacterial infection (e.g. gonorrhoea, Chlamydia), bacterial vaginosis, pelvic inflammatory disease, pseudomembranous colitis, Helicobacter pylori, acute gingivitis, Crohn's disease, rosacea, fungating tumours, impetigo.
The compounds of the present invention may also be used in treating other conditions treatable by eliminating or reducing a bacterial infection. In this case they will act in a secondary manner alongside for example a chemotherapeutic agent used in the treatment of cancer.
In yet another aspect of the invention is provided a compound for use in the preparation of a medicament. The medicament may be for use in the treatment of any of the diseases, infections and indications mentioned in this specification.
In an aspect of the invention is provided a compound of the invention for medical use. The compound may be used in the treatment of any of the diseases, infections and indications mentioned in this specification.
Veterinary uses
They may be used in the treatment of the animal body. In particular, the compounds of the present invention can be used to treat commercial animals such as livestock. The livestock may be mammal (excluding humans) e.g. cows, pigs, goats, sheep, llamas, alpacas, camels and rabbits. The livestock may be birds (e.g. chickens, turkeys, ducks, geese etc.). Alternatively, the compounds of the present invention can be used to treat companion animals such as cats, dogs, etc. The veterinary use may be to treat wild populations of animals in order to prevent the spread of disease to humans or to commercial animals. In this case, the animals may be rats, badgers, deer, foxes, wolves, mice, kangaroos and monkeys and other apes.
In an aspect of the invention is provided a compound of the invention for veterinary use. The compound may be used in the treatment of any of the animal diseases and infections and indications mentioned in this specification.
In another aspect the present invention provides a veterinary formulation comprising a compound of the invention and a veterinarily acceptable excipient.
The methods by which the compounds may be administered for veterinary use include oral administration by capsule, bolus, tablet or drench, topical administration as an ointment, a pour-on, spot-on, dip, spray, mousse, shampoo, collar or powder formulation or, alternatively, they can be administered by injection (e.g. subcutaneously, intramuscularly or intravenously), or as an implant. Such formulations may be prepared in a conventional manner in accordance with standard veterinary practice. The formulations will vary with regard to the weight of active compound contained therein, depending on the species of animal to be treated, the severity and type of infection and the body weight of the animal. For parenteral, topical and oral administration, typical dose ranges of the active ingredient are 0.01 to 100 mg per kg of body weight of the animal. Preferably the range is 0.1 to 10 mg per kg. In any event, the veterinary practitioner, or the skilled person, will be able to determine the actual dosage which will be most suitable for an individual patient, which may vary with the species, age, weight and response of the particular patient. The above dosages are exemplary of the average case; there can, of course, be individual instances where higher or lower dosage ranges are merited, and such are within the scope of this invention.
As an alternative, when treating animals the compounds may be administered with the animal feedstuff and for this purpose a concentrated feed additive or premix may be prepared for mixing with the normal animal feed.
The following table provides an illustrative example of the diseases and corresponding bacterial pathogens which can be treated with antibiotics such as those of the invention within the field of animal health.
Diseases and Bacterial Pathogens Animal Species Affected
Figure imgf000044_0001
Figure imgf000045_0001
Figure imgf000046_0001
Figure imgf000047_0001
Figure imgf000048_0001
Figure imgf000049_0001
Figure imgf000050_0001
Figure imgf000051_0001
Figure imgf000052_0001
Certain compounds of the invention are of particular use in the treatment of mastitis. In this regard, a particularly preferred method of administration is by injection into the udder of a subject (e.g. a cow, a goat, a pig or sheep).
Throughout the description and claims of this specification, the words "comprise" and "contain" and variations of the words, for example "comprising" and "comprises", means "including but not limited to", and is not intended to (and does not) exclude other moieties, additives, components, integers or steps. Throughout the description and claims of this specification, the singular encompasses the plural unless the context otherwise requires. In particular, where the indefinite article is used, the specification is to be understood as contemplating plurality as well as singularity, unless the context requires otherwise.
Features, integers, characteristics, compounds, chemical moieties or groups described in conjunction with a particular aspect, embodiment or example of the invention are to be understood to be applicable to any other aspect, embodiment or example described herein unless incompatible therewith.
Synthesis
The skilled man will appreciate that adaptation of methods known in the art could be applied in the manufacture of the compounds of the present invention.
For example, the skilled person will be immediately familiar with standard textbooks such as "Comprehensive Organic Transformations - A Guide to Functional Group Transformations", RC Larock, Wiley- VCH (1999 or later editions), "March's Advanced Organic Chemistry - Reactions, Mechanisms and Structure", MB Smith, J. March, Wiley, (5th edition or later) "Advanced Organic Chemistry, Part B, Reactions and Synthesis", FA Carey, RJ Sundberg, Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publications, (2001 or later editions), "Organic Synthesis - The Disconnection Approach", S Warren (Wiley), (1982 or later editions), "Designing Organic Syntheses" S Warren (Wiley) (1983 or later editions), "Guidebook To Organic Synthesis" RK Mackie and DM Smith (Longman) (1982 or later editions), etc., and the references therein as a guide.
The skilled chemist will exercise his judgement and skill as to the most efficient sequence of reactions for synthesis of a given target compound and will employ protecting groups as necessary. This will depend inter alia on factors such as the nature of other functional groups present in a particular substrate. Clearly, the type of chemistry involved will influence the choice of reagent that is used in the said synthetic steps, the need, and type, of protecting groups that are employed, and the sequence for accomplishing the protection / deprotection steps. These and other reaction parameters will be evident to the skilled person by reference to standard textbooks and to the examples provided herein.
Sensitive functional groups may need to be protected and deprotected during synthesis of a compound of the invention. This may be achieved by conventional methods, for example as described in "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis" by TW Greene and PGM Wuts, John Wiley & Sons Inc (1999), and references therein. Throughout this specification these abbreviations have the following meanings:
Ac = acetyl ACN = acetonitrile
aq. = aqueous Bn = benzyl
BOC = tert-butyloxycarbonyl DCC = N, N'-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
DCM = Dichloromethane DEAD = Diethylazodicarboxylate
DIPEA = diisopropylethylamine DMAP = N, N- dimethylaminopyridine
DME - dimethoxyethane DMF = N, N-dimethylformamide
DMSO = dimethyl sulfoxide DPPA = Diphenylphosphoryl azide
HATU = 1-[Bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1 H-1 ,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium-3-oxide hexafluorophosphate
mCPBA = meta-chloroperbenzoic acid NMP = N- methylpyrrolidinone
PMB = para-methoxybenzyl RaNi = Raney Nickel™ (a nickel sponge)
T3P = propylphosphonic anhydride TFA = trifluoroacetic acid
THF = tetrahydrofuran
Compounds of formula (II) can be made by Scheme A:
Figure imgf000054_0001
Scheme A
Bromide (1) can be converted into (3) by reaction with the trifluoroborate salts of (2). The reaction can be performed in the presence of a base, such as Cs2CO3, and Pd catalyst, such as palladium(ll)dichloride dichloromethane, in a solvent, such as a mixture of toluene and H2O.
Trifluoroborate salts of (2) can be prepared by Scheme B using the method of Marder et al (JOC, 2012, 77, 10399) and involving the reaction of bromide (4) with bis(pinacolato)diboron, LiOMe, triphenylphosphine polymer bound and Cul in DMF at room temperature, followed by aq. KHF2 in THF at room temperature.
Figure imgf000055_0002
Scheme B
A subset of compounds of formula (II) can be made by Scheme C:
Figure imgf000055_0001
Scheme C
Bromide (1) can be converted into (6) by reaction with the trifluoroborate salts of (5), where PG represents a nitrogen protecting group, such as BOC or Bn. The reaction can be performed in the presence of a base, such as Cs2CO3, and Pd catalyst, such as palladium(ll)dichloride dichloromethane, in a solvent, such as a mixture of toluene and H2O, at a temperature from 70°C to 100°C. Removal of the nitrogen PG in (6) can be performed under standard conditions. If the PG is a BOC then by the action of TFA in DCM at room temperature. If the PG is a Bn then by the action of H2 in the presence of a Pd/C catalyst in 55
an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature. Compound (7) can be converted to (9) by coupling with (8), where LG represents a leaving group, such as a halide. The reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K2CO3, with optional heating.
Trifluoroborate salts of (5) can be prepared by Scheme D using the method of Marder et al (JOC, 2012, 77, 10399) and involving the reaction of bromide (10) with bis(pinacolato)diboron, LiOMe, triphenylphosphine polymer bound and Cul in DMF at room temperature, followed by aq. KHF2 in THF at room temperature.
Figure imgf000056_0001
Scheme D
Compounds of formula (III) can be made by Scheme E:
Figure imgf000056_0002
Tricycle (1 1) can be converted into (13) by reaction with (12), where LG represents a leaving group, such as a halide or tosyl group, The reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K2CO3, with optional heating.
A subset of compounds of formula (III) can be made by Scheme F:
Figure imgf000057_0001
Scheme F
Tricycle (11) can be converted into (15) by reaction with (14), where LG represents a leaving group, such as a halide or tosyl group, and PG represents a nitrogen protecting group, such as BOC or Bn. The reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K2CO3, with optional heating. Removal of the nitrogen PG in
(15) can be performed under standard conditions. If the PG is a BOC then by the action of TFA in DCM at room temperature. If the PG is a Bn then by the action of H2 in the presence of a Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature. Compound
(16) can be converted to (17) by coupling with (8), where LG represents a leaving group, such as a halide. The reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K2CO3, with optional heating.
A subset of compounds of formula (II) can be made by Scheme G:
Figure imgf000058_0001
Scheme G
Bromide (18) can be converted to alkene (19) by reaction with allyltributylstannane in the presence of a Pd catalyst/phosphine ligand combination, such as bis(tri-tert- butylphosphine)palladium(O), in a solvent, such as 1 ,4-dioxane, with optional heating. Alkene (19) can be converted to aldehyde (20) by treatment with osmium tetroxide and sodium periodate in a solvent, such as a mixture of H2O in THF, at room temperature. Reductive amination of (20) with amine (21), where PG represents a nitrogen protecting group, such as BOC or Bn, can be effected by first heating in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature of 50°C to 80°C, in the presence of 4A sieves, followed by treatment with sodium triacetoxyborohydride. Removal of the nitrogen PG in (22) to give amine (23) can be performed under standard conditions. If the PG is a BOC then by the action of TFA in DCM at room temperature. If the PG is a Bn then by the action of H2 in the presence of a Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature. Amine (23) can be converted to (25) (a subset of compounds of formula II) by heating with aldehyde (24) in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature of 50°C to 80°C, in the presence of 4A sieves, followed by treatment with sodium triacetoxyborohydride. Amine (23) can be converted to (26) (another subset of compounds of formula II) by coupling with (8), where LG represents a leaving group, such as a halide. The reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K2CO3, with optional heating.
A further subset of compounds of formula (II) can be made by Scheme H:
Figure imgf000059_0001
Scheme H
Bromide (18) can be converted to acid (27) by first forming the Grignard with Mg activated by 1 ,2-dibromoethane and Me3SiCI in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature from room temperature to 100°C, followed by quenching with CO2. Coupling of the acid (27) to alcohol (28), where PG represents a nitrogen protecting group, such as BOC or Bn, can be effected with PPh3 and DEAD in a solvent, such as toluene, at a temperature from 0°C to room temperature. Removal of the nitrogen PG in ester (29) to give amine (30) can be performed under standard conditions. If the PG is a BOC then by the action of TFA in DCM at room temperature. If the PG is a Bn then by the action of H2 in the presence of a Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature. Amine (30) can be converted to
(31) (a yet further subset of compounds of formula II) by heating with aldehyde (24) in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature from 50°C to 80°C, in the presence of 4A sieves, followed by treatment with sodium triacetoxyborohydride. Amine (30) can be converted to
(32) (a further subset of compounds of formula II) by coupling with (8), where LG represents a leaving group, such as a halide. The reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K2CO3, with optional heating.
A subset of compounds of formula (III) can be made by Scheme I:
Figure imgf000060_0001
Scheme I
Pyridone (33) can be converted to alkene (34) by reaction with allyl bromide in a solvent, such as DMF, in the presence of a base, such as K2CO3, at a temperature from 100°C to 150°C. Alkene (34) can be converted to aldehyde (35) by treatment with osmium tetroxide and sodium periodate in a solvent, such as a mixture of H2O in THF, at a temperature from 0°C to room temperature. Reductive amination of aldehyde (35) with amine (21), where PG represents a nitrogen protecting group, such as BOC or Bn, can be effected by first heating in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature of 50°C to 80°C, in the presence of 4A sieves, followed by treatment with sodium triacetoxyborohydride. Removal of the nitrogen PG in
(36) to give amine (37) can be performed under standard conditions. If the PG is a BOC then by the action of TFA in DCM at room temperature. If the PG is a Bn then by the action of H2 in the presence of a Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature. Amine (37) can be converted to (38) (a subset of compounds of formula III) by heating with aldehyde (24) in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature from 50°C to 80°C, in the presence of 4A sieves, followed by treatment with sodium triacetoxyborohydride. Amine
(37) can be converted to (39) (another subset of compounds of formula III) by coupling with (8), where LG represents a leaving group, such as a halide. The reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K2CO3, with optional heating.
A further subset of compounds of formula (III) can be made by Scheme J:
Figure imgf000061_0001
Ring opening of epoxide (40) (prepared as described in Scheme K) by tricycle (33) using a base, such as K2CO3 or Cs2CO3, in a solvent, such as DMF, at a temperature from 70°C to 150°C can provide hydroxy (41) (a subset of compounds of formula (III)). Conversion of the hydroxyl in (41) to the corresponding azide (42) can be accomplished under Mitsunobu reaction conditions using DPPA, DEAD and PPh3 in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature from 0°C to room temperature. Azide (42) can be converted to amine (43) (another subset of compounds of formula (III)) by reduction. The reaction can be performed using PPh3 in a solvent, such as a mixture of H2O in THF, at room temperature. Alternatively, the reaction can be performed by hydrogenation in the presence of Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature.
Epoxide (40) can be made by Scheme K:
Figure imgf000062_0001
Carboxylic acid (44), where PG represents a nitrogen protecting group, such as BOC or Bn, can be converted to hydroxy (45) by reaction with ethyl chloroformate in the presence of a base, such as Et3N, in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature of 0°C, followed by treatment with NaBH4 in a solvent, such as a mixture of H2O in THF, at a temperature from 5°C to room temperature. Oxidation of the hydroxyl to an aldehyde (e.g. using Dess-Martin Periodinane in a solvent, such as DCM, at room temperature) followed by a Wittig reaction using Ph2PCH3 (prepared in situ from the action of dimsyl sodium in DMSO on methyltriphenylphosphonium bromide) in a solvent, such as DMSO, at a room temperature, can provide alkene (46). Expoxidation of the alkene to (47) can be effected with mCPBA in a solvent, such as DCM, at a temperature from 0°C to room temperature. Removal of the nitrogen PG in (47) to give amine (48) can be performed under standard conditions. If the PG is a BOC then by the action of TFA in DCM at room temperature. If the PG is a Bn then by the action of H2 in the presence of a Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature. Amine (48) can be converted to (40) by coupling with (8), where LG represents a leaving group, such as a halide. The reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K2CO3, with optional heating.
A further subset of compounds of formula (III) can be made by Scheme L:
Figure imgf000063_0001
Ring opening of epoxide (47) (prepared as described in Scheme K) by tricycle (33) using a base, such as K2CO3 or Cs2CO3, in a solvent, such as DMF, at a temperature from 70°C to 150°C can provide hydroxy (49). Removal of the nitrogen PG in (49) to give amine (50) can be performed under standard conditions. If the PG is a BOC then by the action of TFA in DCM at room temperature. If the PG is a Bn then by the action of H2 in the presence of a Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature. Amine (50) can be converted to (51) (a subset of compounds of formula III) by heating with aldehyde (24) in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature from 50°C to 80°C, in the presence of 4A sieves, followed by treatment with sodium triacetoxyborohydride.
Bromide (18) can be made by Scheme M :
Figure imgf000064_0001
Scheme M
Pyridone (52) can be converted to bromide (18) with (53), where LG represents a leaving group, such as halide or tosyl group. The reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or THF, in the presence of a base, such as K2CO3, with optional heating.
Certain compounds of formula (IV), (V), (VI), (VII), (VIII) and (XXXXXXI) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (54), which can be made by Scheme N:
Figure imgf000064_0002
Scheme N
Carboxylic acid (55) can be converted into benzoxazine-2,4-dione (56) by reaction with triphosgene in a halogenated solvent, such as 1 ,2-dichloroethane, at a temperature from room temperature to 75°C. Treatment of (56) with Et3N, followed by heating with ethyl nitroacetate in a solvent, such as THF, can provide the nitro (57), which can be reduced to the amine (58) by hydrogenation in the presence of Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature. Alternatively, the nitro can be reduced to the amine using sodium hydrosulphite in the presence of NaOH and H2O at room temperature. Oxazole ring formation to (54) can be achieved by acylation of amine (58) with R4COCI in the presence of a base, such as Et3N, in a solvent, such as THF, followed by heating in a high boiling solvent. A subset of oxazole pyridones (54), where R4 = H can be formed from (58) by treatment with triethyl orthoformate at a temperature from 80°C to 110°C. Alternatively, oxazole pyridones (54), where R4 = H, can be directly formed from (56) by treatment with the anion of ethyl isocyanoacetate (formed from NaH in DMF at room temperature) in DMF at a temperature from 80°C to 110°C.
Certain compounds of formula (IX) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (59), which can be made by Scheme O:
Figure imgf000065_0001
Scheme O
Pd coupling of amine (60) to iodothiazole (61) (e.g. using Pd(dppf)Cl2 and Cs2CO3 in a 10: 1 dioxane:H2O mixture at 70 °C) provides thiazole (62). Cyclisation (e.g. by heating with NaH in DMF) can provide thiazole (59).
Replacement of (61) in Scheme O with halothiazole (63) (where X = CI, Br, I) can provide thiazole (64), which can be used in Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L to provide certain compounds of formula (XIII).
Figure imgf000065_0002
Certain compounds of formula (XIX), (XXIV), (XXV), (XXIX), (XXXVII), (XXXVIII), (XXXIX), (XXXX), (XXXXI), (XXXXII), (XXXXIII), (XXXXIV), (XXXXV) and (XXXXXX) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (65), which can be made by Scheme P:
Figure imgf000066_0001
Scheme P
Amine (66) can be converted into iodide (67) (e.g. by treating with iodine and NaHCO3 in a solvent, such as EtOAc, at room temperature). Acylation with an acid chloride (68) (e.g. using Et3N in THF at room temperature) can provide amide (69), which following an intramolecular Heck reaction (e.g. by heating amide (69) with Pd(PPh3)4 and NEt3 in acetonitrile) can give tricycle (65).
Certain compounds of formula (XXXXVI) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (70), which can be made by Scheme Q:
Figure imgf000066_0002
Scheme Q
Acylation of iodide (67) (prepared as described in Scheme P) with acyl chloride (71) (e.g. using Et3N in THF at room temperature) can provide amide (72), which following an intramolecular Heck reaction (e.g. by heating amide (72) with Pd(PPh3)4 and NEt3 in acetonitrile) can give tricycle (70). Certain compounds of formula (XXXXVII) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (73), which can be made by Scheme R:
Figure imgf000067_0001
Scheme R
Acylation of amine (74) with acyl chloride (75), where PG represents a nitrogen protecting group, such as PMB, (e.g. using Et3N in THF at room temperature) can provide amide (76). Removal of the nitrogen PG in (76) to give pyrrole (77) can be performed under standard conditions. In the case of PMB use of TFA in DCM at room temperature. An addition- elimination cyclisation reaction (e.g. by heating pyrrole (77) with K2CO3 in DMSO) can furnish tricycle (73).
Certain compounds of formula (XXXIV) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (78), which can be made by Scheme S:
Figure imgf000067_0002
Scheme S
Pd coupling of boronate (60) to 1-benzyl-5-bromopyrazole (79) (e.g. using Pd(dppf)Cl2 and Cs2CO3 in a 10:1 dioxane:H2O mixture at 70°C) provides pyrazole (80). Subsequent debenylation of the product (e.g. using Pd/C and H2 in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature) provides amine (81). Reaction of amine (81) with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (78).
Certain compounds of formula (XXXI) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (82), which can be made by Scheme T:
Figure imgf000068_0003
Scheme T
Acylation of amine (74) with pyrazole acid (83) (e.g. use of DIPEA and HATU in a solvent, such as DCM, at room temperature) by can provide amide (84), which can undergo an intramolecular ring closing reaction (e.g. by treatment with a base, such as K2CO3, in a solvent, such as DMF, at a temperature from 100°C to 150°C) to provide pyrazole (82).
Replacement of (83) in Scheme T with imidazole acid (85) can provide imidazole (86), which can be used in Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L to provide certain compounds of formula (XXXII).
Figure imgf000068_0001
Certain compounds of formula (XXI) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (87), which can be made by Scheme U:
Figure imgf000068_0002
Scheme U Pd coupling of boronate (60) to bromopyrazole (88) (e.g. using Pd(dppf)Cl2 and Cs2CO3 in a 10: 1 dioxane:H2O mixture at 70°C) can provide pyrazole (89). Ester hydrolysis (e.g. using aq. NaOH in ethanol with optional heating) followed by lactam formation (e.g. by heating with propylphosphonic anhydride and diisopropylamine in THF) can provide pyrazole (87).
Replacement of (88) in Scheme U with bromopyrazole (90) can provide pyrazole (91), which can be used in Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L to provide certain compounds of formula (XXII).
Figure imgf000069_0001
Replacement of (88) in Scheme U with bromoisothiazole (92) can provide isothiazole (93), which can be used in Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L to provide certain compounds of formula (XXIII).
Figure imgf000069_0002
Replacement of (88) in Scheme U with bromoisothiazole (94) can provide isothiazole (95), which can be used in Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L to provide certain compounds of formula (XX).
Figure imgf000070_0002
Certain compounds of formula (XXX) and (XXVII) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediates (96) and (97) respectively, which can be made by Scheme V:
Figure imgf000070_0001
Benzoxazine-2,4-dione (56) (prepared as described in Scheme N) can be converted into β- ketoamide (99) by reaction with ethyl 3-(benzyloxy)propanoate (98) (e.g. with heating in DMF following deprotonation of (98) with NaH). Removal of the benzyl protecting group (e.g. using Pd/C and H2 in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature) followed by oxidation of (100) (e.g. using Dess-Martin Periodinane in a solvent, such as DCM, at room temperature) can provide (101). Treatment of (101) with hydrazine (102) (e.g. in the presence of a solvent, such as THF, in the presence of acetic acid) can provide pyrazoles (96) and (97). Certain compounds of formula (XXXIII) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (103), which can be made by Scheme W:
Figure imgf000071_0001
Displacement of the chloride in (104) by treatment with 4-methoxybenzylamine (e.g. in an alcohol, such as isopropanol, at temperature from 80°C to 100°C) can provide nitro (105), which can be reduced to amine (106) (e.g. by use of H2 in the presence of RaNi in a solvent, such as THF, at room temperature). Amine (106) can be converted to dione (107) by heating in diethyloxalate, which on treatment with POCI3 (e.g. in the presence of a base, such as DIPEA, in a solvent, such as DMF, at a temperature from 80°C to 100°C) can provide chloride (108). Chloride displacement with aminoacetal (109) can provide acetal (110), which in the presence of an acid (e.g. TFA in DCM) can cyclise with PMB deprotection to form imidazole (103).
Certain compounds of formula (XII) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (111), which can be made by Scheme X:
Figure imgf000072_0001
Treatment of (56) (prepared as described in Scheme N) with Et3N, followed by heating with ethyl 2-(benzyloxy)acetate in a solvent, such as THF, can provide the hydroxy (112), which can be converted to the chloro (113) (e.g. by heating with POCl3). Displacement of the resultant chlorine with a protected amine (e.g. para-methoxybenzylamine in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature) and then deprotecting the amine (in the case para- methoxybenzylamine this can be achieved using TFA e.g. in DCM at room temperature) can provide amine (114). The alcohol benzyl protecting group of amine (114) can be removed (e.g. using Pd/C and H2 in an alcohol, such as EtOH, at room temperature) to provide amino alcohol (115). Oxazole ring formation to (111) can be achieved by acylation of amine alcohol (115) with R4COCI in the presence of a base, such as Et3N, in a solvent, such as THF, followed by heating in a high boiling solvent. A subset of oxazole pyridones (11 1), where R4 = H can be formed from (115) by treatment with triethyl orthoformate at a temperature from 80°C to 1 10°C.
Certain compounds of formula (X) and (XI) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (116) and (117) respectively, which can be made by Scheme Y:
Figure imgf000073_0001
The hydroxyl in (57) (prepared as described in Scheme N) can be converted to chloro (1 18) (e.g. by heating with POCl2). Displacement of the resultant chlorine with a protected amine (e.g. para-methoxybenzylamine in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature) and then deprotecting the amine (in the case of para-methoxybenzylamine this can be achieved using TFA in DCM at room temperature) can provide nitro amine (1 19). The nitro in (1 19) can be reduced to amine (120) by hydrogenation in the presence of Pd/C catalyst in an alcoholic solvent, such as EtOH, at room temperature. Alternatively, the nitro can be reduced to the amine using sodium hydrosulphite in the presence of NaOH and H2O at room temperature. Imidazole ring formation to (121) can be achieved by treatment with R4COOH in the presence of T3P and a base, such as Et3N, in a solvent, such as DMF, at a temperature from 80°C to 100°C. In the case of R4 = H imidazole ring closure can be affected by treatment with triethyl orthoformate at a temperature from 80°C to 1 10°C. Intermediate (121) can be used in Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L to deliver compounds of formula (X) and (XI) where R5 = H. Intermediate (121) can be converted to (116) and (1 17) by reaction with R5-LG, where LG represents a leaving group, such as halide or tosyl group. The reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or MeOH, in the presence of a base, such as K2C03 or NaH, with optional heating.
Certain compounds of formula (XXXV) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (122), which can be made by Scheme Z:
Figure imgf000074_0001
Scheme Z
Treatment of iodo (123) with alkyne (124) under Pd coupling (e.g. use of Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 and Cul in the presence of a base, such as Et3N, in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature) can provide alkyne (125). Oxidation of the triple bond to the dicarbonyl (126) can be achieved with KMnCU (e.g. in the presence of MgSO4 and a base, such as NaHCO3, in a solvent, such as H2O, at room temperature). Treatment of (126) with NH4OH in the presence of R4CHO can provide imidazole (127). Nitro reduction to give amine (128) can be effected using sodium hydrosulphite in the presence of NaOH and H2O at room temperature. Reaction of amine (128) with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (122).
Certain compounds of formula (XXXVI) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (129), which can be made by Scheme A1 :
Figure imgf000075_0001
Scheme A1
Carboxylic acid (55) can be treated with ethoxycarbonyl isothiocyanate in a solvent, such as ACN, at a temperature of 80°C to form (130), which on treatment with AC2O at a temperature of 60°C can cyclise to (131). Hydrolysis using a base (e.g. use of NaOMe, in a solvent, such as ACN/THF, at a temperature from 60°C to 80°C) can form (132). Treatment with iodomethane in the presence of a base (e.g. use of NaOMe, in a solvent, such as MeOH, at room temperature) can deliver (133), which on treatment with POCI3 (e.g. in the presence of a base, such as pyridine, at a temperature from 80°C to 110°C) can form the chloride (134). Displacement of the resultant chlorine with a protected amine (e.g. para- methoxybenzylamine in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature) and then deprotecting the amine (in the case of para-methoxybenzylamine this can be achieved using TFA in DCM at room temperature) can provide amine (135), which on reaction with (136), where LG represents a leaving group, such as halide or tosyl, in a solvent, such as 1 ,4-dioxane, at a temperature from 70°C to 100°C, can form (137). Removal of the SMe and formation of (129) can be effected by treatment with a base (e.g. use of KOH in a solvent, such as H2O/MeOH, at a temperature from 80°C to 100°C).
Certain compounds of formula (XXXXXIII) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (138), which can be made by Scheme B1 :
Figure imgf000075_0002
Scheme B1
Chlorine displacement in (108) (prepared as described in Scheme W) with hydrazine (e.g. in a solvent, such as EtOH, with optional heating) can form (139), which on treatment with R4COCI, in the presence of a base, such as pyridine, with optional heating, followed by heating the resultant product in the presence of polyphosphoric acid, at a temperature from 100°C to 150°C can give triazole (140). In the case of R4 = H ring closure to the triazole from (139) can be effected by treatment with triethyl orthoformate at a temperature from 80°C to 110°C. Removal of the PMB protecting group to give (138) can be effected with TFA (e.g. in a solvent, such as DCM, at room temperature).
Certain compounds of formula (XXXXXI) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (141), which can be made by Scheme C1 :
Figure imgf000076_0001
Scheme C1
Chlorine displacement in (134) (prepared as described in Scheme A1) with hydrazine (e.g. in a solvent, such as EtOH, with optional heating) can form (142), which on treatment with R4COCI, in the presence of a base, such as pyridine, with optional heating, followed by heating the resultant product in the presence of polyphosphoric acid, at a temperature from 100°C to 150°C can give triazole (143). In the case of R4 = H ring closure to the triazole from (143) can be effected by treatment with triethyl orthoformate at a temperature from 80°C to 110°C. Removal of the SMe and formation of (141) can be effected by treatment with a base (e.g. use of KOH in a solvent, such as H2O/MeOH, at a temperature from 80°C to 100°C).
Certain compounds of formula (XXXXX) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (144), which can be made by Scheme D1 :
Figure imgf000077_0001
Carbamate (146) can be prepared from amine (145) by reaction with ethyl chloroformate in the presence of a base, such as NaHCO3, in a solvent, such as butanone. Treatment of (146) with hydrazide (147) in a solvent, such as NMP, at a temperature from 120°C to 180°C can give tricycle (144).
Certain compounds of formula (XXXXXIV) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (148), which can be made by Scheme E1 :
NH
Figure imgf000077_0002
Treatment of amine (149) with NaNO2/H2O in the presence of 6N HCI at a temperature from 0°C to 5°C, followed by treatment with SnCl2 in the presence of concentrated HCI at a temperature from 0°C to 5°C can give hydrazine (150). Formation of (152) can be effected by treatment of (150) with (151) in the presence of a base, such as pyridine. Acylation of the amine in (152) with ethyl 2-(chlorocarbonyl)actetate in a solvent, such as Et3O , can give (153), which on heating in a solvent, such as NMP, at a temperature between 120°C to 180°C can cyclise to form triazole (154). Nitro reduction of (154) followed by concomitant ring closure can be effected with Fe in the presence of AcOH, at a temperature of 60°C to 100°C to give tricycle (148).
Certain compounds of formula (XXXXIX) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (155), which can be made by Scheme F1 :
( )
Figure imgf000078_0001
Tetrazole (156) can be prepared from cyanide (145) by reaction with NalsU in the presence of NH4CI, in a solvent, such as NMP, at a temperature from 30°C to 100°C. Treatment of amine (156) with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (155).
Certain compounds of formula (XXXXVIII) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (157), which can be made by Scheme G1 :
Figure imgf000078_0002
Treatment of (139) (prepared as described in Scheme B1) with NaNO2/H2O in the presence of 6N HCI at a temperature of 0°C to 5°C, can provide tetrazole (158). Removal of the PMB protecting group to give tricycle (157) can be effected with TFA (e.g. in a solvent, such as DCM, at room temperature). Certain compounds of formula (XXXXXII) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (159), which can be made by Scheme H1 :
Figure imgf000079_0001
Amide coupling between amine (67) (prepared as described in Scheme P) and carboxylic acid (160) can be effected by standard amide coupling reagents, such as DCC in a solvent, such as DCM, in the presence of DMAP. Treatment of (161) with an azide, such as NaN3, in the presence of Cul, in a solvent, such as DMSO, at a temperature from 50°C to 100°C, can form tricycle (159).
Certain compounds of formula (XXXXXV) and (XXXXXVI) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (162) and (163) respectively, which can be made by Scheme 11 :
Figure imgf000079_0002
Treatment of iodo (123) with alkyne (164) under Pd coupling (e.g. use of Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 and Cul in the presence of a base, such as Et3N, in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature) can provide alkyne (165). 1.3-Dipolar cycloaddition with benzyl azide (e.g. with heating in toluene at a temperature from 50°C to 80°C) can provide triazole (166). Nitro reduction of (166) followed by concomitant ring closure can be effected with Zn in the presence of AcOH, with optional heating, to give tricycle (167). The benzyl protecting group of triazole (167) can be removed (e.g. using Pd/C and H2 in an alcohol, such as EtOH, at room temperature) to provide (168). Intermediate (168) can be used in Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L to deliver compounds of formula (XXXXXV) and (XXXXXVI) where R5 = H. Intermediate (168) can be converted to (162) and (163) by reaction with R5-LG, where LG represents a leaving group, such as halide or tosyl group. The reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or MeOH, in the presence of a base, such as K2CO3 or NaH, with optional heating.
Certain compounds of formula (XXVIII) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (169) which can be made by Scheme J1 :
Figure imgf000080_0001
Silver mediated Pd catalyst CH arylation of (123) with isothiazole (170) (e.g. using AgF and Pd(PPh3)2CI2 and PPh3 in a solvent, such as ACN, at a temperature from 50°C to 80°C) can provide (171). Nitro reduction of (171), followed by concomitant ring closure can be effected with Fe in the presence of HCI, in a solvent mixture of EtOH/H2O, with optional heating, to give tricycle (172). Treatment of bromide (172) under Suzuki coupling conditions with R4B(OH)2 in the presence of a Pd catalyst, such as [1 , 1 '-bis(diphenylphosphino)-ferrocene]- dichloropalladium(ll), in the presence of a base, such as NaHCO3, in a solvent mixture of DME/H2O, at a temperature from 50°C to 80°C, can provide (169). Alternatively, intermediate (169) can be accessed by treatment of bromide (172) with (n-Bu)3SnR4 in the presence of a Pd catalyst, such as Pd(PPh3)4, in a solvent, such as toluene, from a temperature of 80°C to 120°C. Hydrogenation of (172) (e.g. using Pd/C and H2 in an alcohol, such as EtOH, at room temperature) can provide intermediate (169) where R4 = H.
Certain compounds of formula (XXVI) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (173) which can be made by Scheme K1 :
Figure imgf000081_0001
Carboxylic acid (55) can be converted to primary carboxamide (174) using standard amide coupling procedures, such as DCC in the presence of benzotriazole, in a solvent, such as DCM, followed by treatment with NH4OH in a solvent, such as THF. Further amide coupling of the amine (174) and carboxylic acid (160) can be effected by standard amide coupling reagents, such as DCC in a solvent, such as DCM, in the presence of DMAP. Treatment of (175) with chlorocarbonylsulphenyl chloride in a solvent, such as THF, at a temperature from 40°C to 65°C can form cycloadduct (176), which on heating in a high boiling solvent, such as xylene, can form tricycle (173).
Certain compounds of formula (XIV) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (177) which can be made by Scheme L1 :
Figure imgf000082_0002
Displacement of the chlorine in (113) (prepared as described in Scheme X) with NHR5 (e.g. in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature) can provide amine (178). The alcohol benzyl protecting group of amine (178) can be removed (e.g. using Pd/C and H2 in an alcohol, such as EtOH, at room temperature) to provide amino alcohol (179). Treatment of amino alcohol (179) with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (177).
Certain compounds of formula (XVII) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (180) which can be made by Scheme M 1 :
Figure imgf000082_0001
Benzylation of the NH in benzoxazine-2,4-dione (56) (prepared as described in Scheme N) can be effected with BnBr in the presence of a base, such as K2CO3, in a solvent such as DMF, with optional heating. Treatment of (181) with Et3N, followed by heating with ethyl nitroacetate in a solvent, such as THF, can provide the nitro (182), which can be reduced to the amine (183) using sodium hydrosulphite in the presence of NaOH and H2O at room temperature. Treatment of amino alcohol (183) with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (184). Hydrogenation of (84) (e.g. using Pd/C and H2 in an alcohol, such as EtOH, at room temperature) can provide intermediate (180) where R5 = H. Oxazolidone (184) can be converted to (185) by reaction with R5-LG, where LG represents a leaving group, such as halide or tosyl group. The reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or MeOH, in the presence of a base, such as K2C03 or NaH, with optional heating. Hydrogenation of (185) (e.g. using Pd/C and H2 in an alcohol, such as EtOH, at room temperature) can provide intermediate (180). The PMB group can be considered an alternative PG for the NH in benzoxazine-2,4-dione (56), where deprotection at the appropriate stage can be achieved using TFA in DCM at room temperature.
Certain compounds of formula (XVI) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (186) which can be made by Scheme N1 :
Figure imgf000083_0001
The hydroxyl in (182) (prepared as described in Scheme M1) can be converted to chloro (187) (e.g. by heating with POCI3). Displacement of the chlorine in (187) with NHR5 (e.g. in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature) can provide amine nitro (188). The nitro can be reduced to the diamine (189) using sodium hydrosulphite in the presence of NaOH and H2O at room temperature. Treatment of the diamine (189) with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (190). The cyclic urea (190) can be converted to (191) by reaction with R5-LG, where LG represents a leaving group, such as halide or tosyl group. The reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or MeOH, in the presence of a base, such as K2CO3 or NaH, with optional heating. Hydrogenation of (191) (e.g. using Pd/C and H2 in an alcohol, such as EtOH, at room temperature) can provide intermediate (186). Intermediate (186) where R5 = H can be made by treatment of diamine (120) (prepared as described in Scheme Y) with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent.
Certain compounds of formula (XXXXXVII) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (192) which can be made by Scheme 01 :
Figure imgf000084_0001
Hydrogenation of (112) (prepared as described in Scheme X) (e.g. using Pd/C and H2 in an alcohol, such as EtOH, at room temperature) can provide diol (193), which on treatment with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (192).
Certain compounds of formula (XVIII) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (194) which can be made by Scheme P1 :
Figure imgf000085_0001
Displacement of the chlorine in (1 18) (prepared as described in Scheme Y) with thiourea (e.g. heating neat at 170°C to 190°C, followed by treatment with EtOH and NaOH) can provide nitro thiol (195). The nitro can be reduced to the amino thiol (196) using Zn dust in the presence of concentrated HCI and AcOH, with optional heating, which on treatment with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (197). Intermediate (197) can be used in Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L to deliver compounds of formula (XVIII) where R5 = H. Intermediate (197) can be converted to (194) by reaction with R5-LG, where LG represents a leaving group, such as halide or tosyl group. The reaction can be performed in a solvent, such as DMF or MeOH, in the presence of a base, such as K2CO3 or NaH, with optional heating.
Certain compounds of formula (XV) can be made as described by Schemes A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J and L using intermediate (198) which can be made by Scheme Q1 :
Figure imgf000086_0001
Acylation of amine (199) with ethyl chloroformate (e.g. using Et3N in THF at room temperature) can give carbamate (200). Bromination of (200) with Br2 in a solvent, such as CHCl2 can give bromide (201). The bromide can be displaced with sodium methanethiolate in a solvent, such as MeOH, followed by mCPBA oxidation of the methyl sulphide (e.g. in a solvent, such as DCM, at a temperature from 0°C to room temperature) to give methyl sulphoxide (202). Ring closure of (202) to (203) can be effected by a base, such as NaH, in a solvent, such as THF, with optional heating. The hydroxyl in (203) can be converted to chloro (204) (e.g. by heating with POCI3). Displacement of the chlorine in (204) with NHR5 (e.g. in a solvent, such as DMF, at room temperature) can provide amine (205). A Pummerer rearrangement of the methyl sulphoxide using trifluoroacetic anhydride in a solvent, such as DCM, followed by treatment with a base, such as Et3N in a solvent, such as MeOH, can give amino thiol (206), which on treatment with phosgene (e.g. in THF at room temperature) or an equivalent reagent can provide tricycle (198).
All of the above Schemes N to Q1 provide compounds of the invention in which A is O. Such compounds can be converted into compounds in which A is =S, =NR6 and =NOR6 according to Schemes R1 , S1 and T1 , which can be used to provide compounds of the invention where A is S, =NR6 and =NOR6
Figure imgf000087_0001
Amide (33) can, for example, be converted to thioamide (207) by heating with P2S5 in pryridine.
Figure imgf000087_0002
S S1
Amide (33) can, for example, be converted to amidinine (208) by heating with POCI3 and heating the product with the primary amine NH2R6.
S T1
Figure imgf000087_0003
Amide (33) can, for example, be converted to oxime (209) by heating with POCI3 and heating the product with the O-substituted hydroxylamine NH2OR6. Compounds of formula I where one of X1 , X2, X3 or X4 represents an N-oxide can be made by oxidation of the corresponding pyridine substrate. The reaction can be effected using standard oxidising reagents, such as mCPBA, in a solvent, such as CH2CI2, at a temperature from 0°C to room temperature.
Compounds of formula I where X4 represents an N-oxide and X3 represents a CH can be converted to compounds of formula I where X4 represents a NH and X3 represents a C=0. The reaction can be effected using neat AC2O at a temperature of 140°C.
Experimental Analytical Methods
NMR spectra were obtained on a LC Bruker AV400 using a 5 mm QNP probe (Method A) or Bruker AVIII 400 Nanobay using a 5 mm BBFQ with z-gradients (Method B).
MS was carried out on a Waters ZQ MS (Method A, B, C and D) using H2O and ACN (0.1 % formic acid - acidic pH; 0.1 % ammonia - basic pH). Wavelengths were 254 and 210 nM.
Method A
Column: Gemini NX C18, 5 μηι, 50 x 2 mm. Column flow rate was 1 mL/min. Injection volume 10 μΙ_
Figure imgf000088_0001
Method B
Column: Waters XBridge C 18, 5μηι, 50 x 2.1 mm. Flow rate: 0.8 mL/min. Injection volume 10 μΙ_
Figure imgf000088_0002
Figure imgf000089_0003
Method C
Column: YMC-Triart C18 50 x 2 mm, 5 uM. Flow rate: 0.8 mUmin. Injection volume 5 μΙ_.
Figure imgf000089_0001
Method D
Column: YMC-Triart C18 50 x 2 mm, 5 uM. Flow rate: 0.8 mUmin. Injection volume 5-10 μΙ_
Figure imgf000089_0002
Preparative HPLC was performed using a Waters 3100 Mass detector (Method A) or Waters 2767 Sample Manager (Method B) using H2O and ACN (0.1-% formic acid - acidic pH; 0.1 % ammonia - basic pH).
Method A Column: XBridge™ prep C18 5 μΜ OBD 19 x 100 mm. Flow rate: 20 mUmin. Method B
Column: XBridge™ prep C18 5 μΜ OBD 19 x 100 mm. Flow rate: 20 mUmin.
Example 1 - 5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1,4]dioxinor2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino )piperidin-1 - yl]ethyl}-4H,5H-[1,3]oxazolor4,5-c]quinolin-4-one A
(a) 4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one
Figure imgf000090_0001
To a mixture of NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil) (882 mg, 22.07 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (10 ml_) at room temperature under N2 was added ethyl isocyanoacetate (2.41 ml_, 22.07 mmol) dropwise and the resulting mixture was left to stir for 30 min. To the resulting mixture was added 2,4-dihydro-1 H-3,1-benzoxazine-2,4-dione (3 g, 18.39 mmol) and the reaction heated to 100°C for 3 h. The reaction was allowed to cool to room temperature, quenched with saturated aq. NH4CI solution (50 ml_) and poured into H2O (150 ml_). The precipitate was filtered off and washed with diethyl ether to give 4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5- c]quinolin-4-one (1.20 g, 35% yield) as a brown solid.
LC-MS (Method A acidic) 187.3 [M+H]+; RT 1.21 min
(b) 5-(prop-2-en-1-yl)-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one
Figure imgf000090_0002
A mixture of 4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one (500 mg, 7.69 mmol), allyl bromide (0.28 ml_, 3.22 mmol) and K2CO3 (482 mg, 3.49 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (4 ml_) was heated in a microwave (Biotage Initiator) at 150°C for 30 min. The reaction was diluted with saturated aq. NH4CI (50 ml_) and then extracted with EtOAc (3 x 50 ml_). The combined organics were washed with H2O (50 ml_), brine (50 ml_), dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography eluting with petroleum ether (40/60) to EtOAc to afford 5-(prop-2-en-1-yl)-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one (363 mg, 60% yield) as an ochre solid.
LC-MS (Method A acidic) 227.4 [M+H]+; RT 1.59 min
(c) 2-{4-oxo-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-5-yl}acetaldehyde
Figure imgf000091_0001
Osmium tetroxide (4 % in H2O) (0.1 ml_, 0.02 mmol) was added to a solution of 5-(prop-2- en-1-yl)-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one (100 mg, 0.44 mmol) and sodium periodate (236 mg, 1.11 mmol) in THF (4 ml_) and H2O (3.5 ml_) under N2. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir at room temperature for 18 h. The reaction was diluted with brine (50 ml_) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 50 ml_). The combined organics were dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude was purified by flash chromatography eluting with petroleum ether (40/60) to EtOAc to afford 2-{4-oxo-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-5- yl}acetaldehyde (86 mg, 85% yield) as a cream solid.
LC-MS (Method A acidic) 229.4 [M+H]+; RT 1.16 min
(d) tert-butyl N-[1-(2-{4-oxo-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-5-yl]ethyl}piperidin-4- yl]carbamate
Figure imgf000091_0002
A mixture of 2-{4-oxo-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-5-yl}acetaldehyde (85 mg, 0.37 mmol) and tert-butyl N-(piperidin-4-yl)carbamate (82 mg, 0.41 mmol) in anhydrous THF (5 ml_) with 4A molecular sieves was heated at 75°C for 3 h. The reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (236 mg, 1 .12 mmol) was added and stirred at room temperature for a further 2 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with saturated aq. NaHCO3 solution (50 ml_) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 50 ml_). The combined organics were washed with brine (50 ml_), dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo to afford tert-butyl N-[1 -(2-{4-oxo-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-5- yl]ethyl}piperidin-4-yl]carbamate (132 mg, 86% yield) as a cream solid. The product was used without further purification.
LC-MS (Method A acidic) 413.4 [M+H]+; RT 2.19 min
(e) 5-{2-[4-({2H ,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-4H,5H- [1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one A
Figure imgf000092_0001
A mixture of tert-butyl N-[1 -(2-{4-oxo-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-5-yl]ethyl}piperidin-4- yl]carbamate (105 mg, 0.25 mmol) and trifluoroacetic acid (2.5 ml_, 32.65 mmol) in DCM (2.5 ml_) was stirred at room temperature for 2 h. The reaction mixture solvent was removed under vacuo and the residue dissolved in MeOH and passed through a Silicycle Si- carbonate column. The eluent fractions were combined and solvent removed under vacuo to afford crude 5-[2-(4-aminopiperidin-1-yl)ethyl]-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one.
A mixture of the crude 5-[2-(4-aminopiperidin-1 -yl)ethyl]-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4- one and 2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridine-7-carbaldehyde (synthesised as described in WO2004058144, Example 2(c)) (59 mg, 0.36 mmol) in anhydrous THF (5 ml_) with 4A molecular sieves was heated at 75°C for 3 h. The reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (207 mg, 0.98 mmol) was added and stirred at room temperature for a further 2 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with saturated aq. NaHCO3 solution (50 ml_) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 50 ml_). The combined organics were washed with brine (50 ml_), dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude was purified by flash chromatography eluting with DCM to 15% MeOH/1 % NH3/DCM to afford 5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7- ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one A (20 mg, 17% yield) as a beige solid.
1 H NMR (Method A) (CDCI3): δ ppm 8.10 (m, 2H), 7.98 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.63 (m, 2H), 7.35 (m, 1 H), 6.82 (s, 1 H), 4.56 (t, J = 7.3 Hz, 2H), 4.32 (m, 2H), 4.27 (m, 2H), 3.80 (s, 2H), 3.02 (m, 2H), 2.69 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.53 (m, 1 H), 2.21 (t, J = 1 1.5 Hz, 2H), 1.92 (d, J = 12.8 Hz, 2H), 1.47 (m, 2H); LC-MS (Method A acidic) 462.4 [M+H]+; RT 1.76 min
Example 2 - 6-({[i -(2-{4-oxo-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolor4,5-c]quinolin-5-yl}ethyl)piperidin-4- vnamino }methyl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-1 ,4-benzoxazin-3-one B
Figure imgf000093_0001
To a solution of 5-[2-(4-aminopiperidin-1-yl)ethyl]-4H ,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one (prepared as described in Example 1 step (e)) (28 mg, 0.09 mmol) in THF (5 ml_) and MeOH (0.5 ml_) was added EtaN (0.020 ml_, 0.15 mmol) and 3-oxo-4/-/-1 ,4-benzoxazine-6- carbaldehyde (26 mg, 0.15 mmol) and the mixture was heated at 65°C for 90 min. After cooling to 0°C, sodium borohydride (6 mg, 0.16 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred for a further 45 min. The mixture was poured into H2O (20 ml_) and extracted with DCM (2 x 10 ml_). The combined organics were washed with H2O (10 ml_), brine (10 ml_), dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was purified by preperative TLC (DCM/MeOH 9:1) to furnish 6-({[1-(2-{4-oxo-4H ,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5- c]quinolin-5-yl}ethyl)piperidin-4-yl]amino}methyl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-1 ,4-benzoxazin-3-one B (3.8 mg, 5% yield) as a pale yellow soild.
1 H NMR (Method A) (CDCI3) 8.14 (s, 1 H), 8.01 (dd, J = 7.9, 1.3 Hz, 1 H), 7.60-7.68 (m 2H), 7.38 (m, 1 H), 6.92 (br. s, 3H) , 4.57-4.61 (m, 4H), 3.77 (s, 2H), 3.08 (m, 2H), 2.75 (br. t, J = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.61 (m, 1 H), 2.25 (br. t, J = 10.8 Hz, 2H), 1.95 (br. d, J = 12.5 Hz, 2H), 1.45- 1.57 (m, 2H); LC-MS (Method B acidic) 474.5 [M+H]+, RT 1.92 min
Example 3 - 5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1,4]dioxinor2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino )piperidin-1 - yl]ethyl}-7-methoxy-4H,5H-[1,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one C
Figure imgf000094_0001
Following the procedures of Example 1 (a)-(e) but using 7-methoxy-2,4-dihydro-1 H-3,1- benzoxazine-2,4-dione in step (a) 5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7- ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-7-rnethoxy-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one C was synthesised as a white solid.
1 H NMR (Method A) (CD3OD): δ ppm 8.34 (s, 1 H), 7.93 (s, 1 H), 7.87 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 1 H), 7.09 (d, J = 2.2 Hz, 1 H), 6.99 (dd, J = 8.8, 2.1 Hz, 1 H), 6.87 (s, 1 H), 4.48 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 4.28-4.26 (m, 2H), 4.22-4.19 (m, 2H), 3.88 (s, 3H), 3.77 (s, 2H), 3.03 (d, J = 11.5 Hz, 2H), 2.61 (t, J = 7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.56 (m, 1 H), 2.16-2.06 (m, 2H), 1.89 (d, J = 12.2 Hz, 2H), 1.43 (m, 3H); LC-MS (Method B acidic) 492.5 [M+H]+; RT 1.95 min
Example 4 - 5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-n.4]dioxinor2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl)amino )piperidin-1 - yl]ethyl}-7-fluoro-4H,5H-[1,3]oxazolor4,5-c]quinolin-4-one D
Figure imgf000094_0002
Following the procedures of [Example 1 (a)-(e) but using 7-fluoro-2,4-dihydro-1 H-3,1- benzoxazine-2,4-dione in step (a) 5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7- ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-7-meth^ D was synthesised as a white solid.
1 H NMR (Method A) (CD3OD): δ ppm 8.42 (s, 1 H), 8.01 (dd, J = 8.8, 6.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.90 (s, 1 H), 7.50 (dd, J = 1 1.7, 2.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.18-7.13 (m, 1 H), 6.86 (s, 1 H), 4.46 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 4.28-4.25 (m, 2H), 4.23-4.16 (m, 2H), 3.66 (s, 2H), 2.98 (d, J = 1 1.6 Hz, 2H), 2.60 (t, J = 7.3 Hz, 2H), 2.41 (td, J = 10.8, 5.5 Hz, 1 H), 2.08 (td, J = 12.1 , 2.2 Hz, 2H), 1.84 (d, J = 12.6 Hz 2H), 1.36 (m, 2H); LC-MS (Method B acidic) 480.5 [M+H]+; RT 1.81 min
Example 5 - 7-methoxy-5-{2-[4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyridor3,2-b][1.4]oxazin-6- yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1,3]oxazolor4,5-c]quinolin-4-one E
Figure imgf000095_0001
Following the procedures of Example 1 (a)-(e) but using 7-methoxy-2,4-dihydro-1 H-3,1- benzoxazine-2,4-dione in step (a) and 3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazine-6- carbaldehyde in step (e) 7-methoxy-5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6- yl}rnethyl)arnino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one E was synthesised as a white solid.
1 H NMR (Method A) (CDCI3): δ ppm 8.03 (s, 1 H), 7.88 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.20 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.10 (s, 1 H), 7.00-6.90 (m, 2H), 4.63 (s, 2H), 4.54 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 3.95 (s, 3H), 3.82 (s, 2H), 3.06 (d, J = 11.3 Hz, 2H), 2.72 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.59-2.54 (m, 1 H), 2.24 (t, J = 1 1.1 Hz, 2H), 1.94 (d, J = 12.6 Hz 2H), 1.55-1.47 (m, 2H); LC-MS (Method B acidic) 505.9 [M+H]+; RT 1.71 min
Example 6 - 7-fluoro-5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyridor3,2-b][1.4]oxazin-6- yl)methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1,3]oxazolor4,5-c]quinolin-4-one F
Figure imgf000096_0001
Following the procedures of [Example 1 (a)-(e) but using 7-fluoro-2,4-dihydro-1 H-3,1- benzoxazine-2,4-dione in step (a) and 3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazine-6- carbaldehyde in step (e) 7-fluoro-5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6- yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one F was synthesised as a white solid.
1 H NMR (Method A) (CD3OD): δ ppm 8.42 (s, 1 H), 8.00 (dd, J = 8.8, 6.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.49 (dd, J = 1 1.7, 2.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.20-7.10 (m, 2H), 6.87 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 4.53 (s, 2H), 4.46 (t, J = 7.3 Hz, 2H), 3.70 (s, 2H), 3.00 (d, J = 1 1.6 Hz, 2H), 2.60 (t, J = 7.8 Hz, 2H), 2.47 (m, 1 H). 2.09 (td, J = 11.9, 2.4 Hz, 2H), 1.86 (d, J = 12.7 Hz, 2H), 1.38 (qd, J = 12.1 , 3.7 Hz, 2H); LC-MS (Method B acidic) 493.4 [M+H]+; RT 2.05 min
Example 7 - 5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H.3H.4H-pyridor3.2-b][1.4]oxazin-6- yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolor3,4-c]quinolin-4-one G
(a) dimethyl[(E)-2-(2-nitrophenyl)ethenyl]amine
Figure imgf000096_0002
A mixture of N,N-dimethylfonmamide dimethyl acetal (0.73 ml_, 5.5 mmol) and 1-methyl-2- nitrobenzene (0.43 ml_, 3.65 mmol) in DMF (2 ml_) under N2 was heated in a microwave (Biotage Initiator) at 100°C for 3 h. The reaction mixture was partitioned between Et2O and H2O. The aq. was washed with Et2O (4 x 30 ml_) and the organics were combined, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo to give the product as a dark red oil, which was used without further purification.
LC-MS (Method B acidic) 193.4 [M+H]+; RT 2.62 min
(b) ethyl 4-(2-nitrophenyl)-1 ,2-oxazole-3-carboxylate
Figure imgf000097_0001
To dimethyl[(E)-2-(2-nitrophenyl)ethenyl]amine (617 mg, 3.21 mmol) in THF (10 mL) was added Et3N (0.71 mL, 5.09 mmol). To the reaction mixture was added very slowly a solution of ethyl (2Z)-2-chloro-2-(hydroxyimino)acetate (0.71 mL, 4.86 mmol) in THF (10 mL) in the dark. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature in the dark for 4 h, then concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in EtOH (10 mL), concentrated HCI (2 mL) added and the mixture heated to 50°C overnight. The reaction was concentrated in vacuo and poured onto saturated aq. NaHCO3 solution (20 mL) and extracted with DCM (3 x 10 mL). The combined organics were dried over MgSO4, concentrated in vacuo and the crude product purified by flash chromatography eluting with 40% DCM in petroleum ether (40/60) to petroleum ether (40/60) to afford ethyl 4-(2-nitrophenyl)-1 ,2-oxazole-3-carboxylate (746 mg, 89% yield) as an orange oil.
LC-MS (Method B acidic) 263.3 [M+H]+; RT 2.35 min
(c) 4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one
Figure imgf000097_0002
Ethyl 4-(2-nitrophenyl)-1 ,2-oxazole-3-carboxylate (886 mg, 3.38 mmol) and sodium hydrosulfite (1.18 g, 6.76 mmol) were dissolved in EtOH (3 ml_) and H2O (2 ml_). The mixture was refluxed overnight then concentrated in vacuo. The residue was suspended in saturated aq. NaHCO3 solution and extracted with DCM (2 x 10 ml_). A white solid precipitated during the extraction, which was suspended in DCM/MeOH/EtOAc and the resulting slurry was filtered. The filtrate was combined with the organic extractions and further extractions of the aq. were performed with DCM then with EtOAc. The organic extracts were combined, dried over MgSO4 then concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography eluting with DCM to 20% MeOH in DCM to give 4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one (220 mg, 35 % yield) as a white solid.
LC-MS (Method B acidic) 187.3 [M+H]+; RT 1.52 min
(d) tert-butyl N-[1-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperidine-4-yl]carbamate
Figure imgf000098_0001
In a microwave vial tert-butyl N-(piperidin-4-yl)carbamate (498 mg, 2.49 mmol), 2- bromoethanol (0.18 ml_, 2.54 mmol) and Et3N (0.38 ml_, 2.73 mmol) were dissolved in ACN (2 ml_). The tube was sealed and heated on a hot plate at 50°C overnight. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was dissolved in EtOAc and washed with saturated aq. NaHC03 solution. The aq. was back-extracted with EtOAc and the combined organics were dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography eluting with DCM to 20% MeOH in DCM to give tert-butyl N-[1-(2- hydroxyethyl)piperidine-4-yl]carbamate (415 mg, 68% yield) as a colourless oil.
(e) tert-butyl N-[1-(2-{4-oxo-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-5-yl}ethyl)piperidin-4- yl]carbamate
Figure imgf000099_0001
A mixture of tert-butyl N-[1-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperidine-4-yl]carbamate (400 mg, 1.64 mmol) and EtaN (0.32 ml_, 2.29 mmol) in DCM (5 ml_) was treated at 0°C with methanesulfonyl chloride (0.15 ml_, 1.96 mmol) and the mixture left to stir for 45 min in an ice bath. Potassium phosphate buffer solution (1 M, 5 ml_) was added to the reaction mixture and the DCM was removed in vacuo. The residue was extracted with ice cold EtOAc (3 x 10 ml_). The combined organics were dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo to yield tert-butyl N-{1-[2-(methanesulphonyloxy)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl}carbamate (531 mg, 100% yield) as a white solid, which was used directly in the next step.
A solution of 4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one (165 mg, 0.89 mmol) in DMF (5 ml_) was treated at 0°C with NaH (37 mg, 0.93 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 40 min at room temperature, then tert-butyl N-{1-[2-(methanesulphonyloxy)ethyl]piperidin-4-yl}carbamate (531 mg, 1.65 mmol) in DMF (5 ml_) was added dropwise over 20 min. The mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to remove the DMF and the residue was dissolved in EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with saturated aq. NaHCO3 solution and the aqueous was back extracted with EtOAc. The combined organics were dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo to give a crude residue. The residue was dissolved in MeOH and loaded onto a pre-equilibriated SCX column, washing with MeOH then eluting with MeOH/Nh3. The elution was concentrated in vacuo to give tert-butyl N-[1-(2-{4-oxo-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-5-yl}ethyl)piperidin- 4-yl]carbamate (141 mg, 39% yield) as a brown solid.
LC-MS (Method B acidic) 413.5 [M+H]+; RT 1.53 min
(f) 5-[2-(4-aminopiperidin-1-yl)ethyl]-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one
Figure imgf000100_0001
A solution of tert-butyl N-[1-(2-{4-oxo-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-5-yl}ethyl)piperidin- 4-yl]carbamate (126 mg, 0.31 mmol) in DCM (10 ml_) was treated with 4 M HCI in dioxane (0.5 ml_, 2 mmol). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 1 h, then neutralised with saturated aq. NaHCO3 solution and loaded directly onto a pre-equilibriated SCX column, washing with MeOH, then eluting with MeOH/Nh3. The elution was concentrated in vacuo to give 5-[2-(4-aminopiperidin-1-yl)ethyl]-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one (93 mg, 98% yield).
LC-MS (Method B acidic) 313.5 [M+H]+; RT 0.88 min
(g) 5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1- yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one G
Figure imgf000100_0002
A mixture of 5-[2-(4-aminopiperidin-1-yl)ethyl]-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one (50 mg, 0.16 mmol) and 3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazine-6-carbaldehyde (33 mg, 0.19 mmol) in a solvent mixture of DCM (1 ml_) and THF (2ml_) over molecular sieves (4A) was stirred at room temperature for 5 min. Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (44 mg, 0.21 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with saturated aq. NaHCO3 solution (5 ml_) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 5 ml_). The combined organics were washed with brine (5 ml_), dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo to give a yellow oil. The oil was dissolved in DCM and purified by flash chromatography eluting with DCM to 20% MeOH in DCM to afford 5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo- 2H,3H,4H^yrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H- [1,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one (27 mg, 36% yield) as a white solid.
1H NMR (Method A) (CDCI3): δ ppm 9.18 (s, 1H), 7.79 (d, J = 1.4 Hz, 1H), 7.56-7.44 (m, 2H), 7.33-7.24 (m, 2H), 7.19 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.94 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1H), 4.61 (s, 2H), 4.51 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 2H), 3.85 (s, 2H), 3.10 (d, J = 11.6 Hz, 2H), 2.75 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.67-2.58 (m, 1H). 2.26 (t, J = 9.5 Hz, 2H), 1.98 (d, J = 12.5 Hz, 2H), 1.62-1.50 (m, 2H); LC-MS (Method B acidic) 475.5 [M+H]+; RT 0.90 min
Example 8 - 5-{2-r4-({2H.3H-[1.4]dioxinor2.3-c]Pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1- yl1ethyl}-4H.5H-[1.21oxazolor3.4-clauinolin-4-one H
Figure imgf000101_0001
Following the procedures of Example 7 but using 2H,3H-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridine-7- carbaldehyde in step (g) 5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7- ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one H was synthesised as a white solid.
1H NMR (Method A) (CDCI3): δ ppm 9.20 (s, 1H), 8.10 (s, 1H), 7.80 (d, J = 7.7 Hz, 1H) 7.54-7.49 (m, 2H), 7.33-7.25 (m, 1H), 6.82 (s, 1H), 4.51 (br t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2H), 4.36-4.30 (m, 2H), 4.30-4.25 (m, 2H), 3.85 (s, 2H), 3.07 (d, J = 11.0 Hz, 2H), 2.75 (t, J = 5.9 Hz, 2H), 2.67- 2.62 (m, 1H), 2.35-2.21 (br s, 2H), 2.01-1.96 (d, J = 10.5 Hz, 2H). 1.58 (q, J = 12.0 Hz, 2H); LC-MS (Method B acidic) 462.5 [M+H]+; RT 0.98 min
Example 9 - 7-fluoro-5-{2-r4-({2H.3H.4H-pyranor2.3-c]Pyridin-6- ylmethyltomino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-4H.5H-[1,3]oxazolor4.5-c]quinolin-4-one I
Figure imgf000102_0002
Following the procedures of [Example 1 (a)-(e) but using 7-fluoro-2,4-dihydro-1 H-3,1- benzoxazine-2,4-dione in step (a) and 2H,3H.4H-pyran[2,3-c]pyridine-6-carbaldehyde in step (e) 7-fluoro-5-{2-[4-({2H,3H,4H-pyrano[2,3-c]pyridin-6-ylmethyl}arnino)pipehdin-1- yl]ethyl}-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one I was synthesised as a yellow solid.
1 H NMR (Method A) (CD3OD): δ ppm 8.42 (s, 1 H), 8.01 (dd, J = 8.8, 6.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.85 (s, 1 H), 7.50 (dd, J = 1 1.8, 2.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.16 (td, J = 8.5, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 7.04 (s, 1 H), 4.47 (t, J = 7.3 Hz, 2H), 4.16-4.09 (m, 2H), 3.69 (s, 2H), 2.99 (m, 2H), 2.72 (t, J = 6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.59 (t, J = 7.3 Hz, 2H). 2.48-2.38 (m, 1 H), 2.09 (m, 2H), 1.98-1.87 (m, 2H), 1.85 (d, J = 13 Hz, 2H), 1.44-1.30 (m, 2H); LC-MS (Method C acidic) 478.5 [M+H]+; RT 1.16 min
Example 10 - 7-methoxy-5-(2-f4-[({3-oxo-2H.3H.4H-pyridor3.2-b][1.4]oxazin-6- yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1,21oxazolor3,4-c]quinolin-4-one J
Figure imgf000102_0001
Following the procedures of Example 7 but using 4-methoxy-1-methyl-2-nitrobenzene in step (a) 7-methoxy-5-(2-(4-r((3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pvridor3,2-biri.41oxazin-6- yl}methyl)arnino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one J was synthesised as a yellow solid. 1 H NMR (Method A) (CD3OD): δ ppm 9.45 (s, 1 H), 7.75 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.14 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 6.95-6.80 (m, 3H), 4.51 (s, 2H), 4.34 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 3.70 (s, 2H), 2.99 (m, 2H), 2.58 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H), 2.47 (m, 1 H), 2.07 (m, 2H), 1.86 (m, 2H), 1.39 (m, 2H); LC-MS (Method C basic) 505.5 [M+H]+; RT 2.37 min
Example 11 - 7-fluoro-5-{2-[4-r({7-oxo-6H.7H.8H-pyrimidor5.4-b][1.4]oxazin-2- yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1,21oxazolor3,4-c]quinolin-4-one K
Figure imgf000103_0001
Following the procedures of Example 7 but using 4-fluoro-1-methyl-2-nitrobenzene in step (a) and using 7-oxo-6H,7H,8H-pyrimido[5,4-b][1 ,4]oxazine-2-carbaldehyde in step (g) 7- fluoro-5-(2-{4-[({7-oxo-6H7H,8H-pyrimido[5,4-b][1 ,4loxazin-2-yl}methyl)aminolpiperidin-1- yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one K was synthesised as an off white solid .
1 H NMR (Method A) (DMSO-d6): δ ppm 10.04 (s, 1 H), 8.21 (s, 1 H), 8.12 (dd, J = 8.7, 6.3 Hz, 1 H), 7.46 (dd, J = 12.1 , 2.5 Hz, 1 H), 7.23 (td, J = 8.5, 2.4 Hz, 1 H), 4.70 (s, 2H), 4.37 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 2H), 3.74 (s, 2H), 2.90 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, 2H), 2.57 (dd, J = 12.8, 5.9 Hz, 2H), 2.43 (dq, J = 8.4, 4.1 , 3.1 Hz, 2H), 2.07 (t, J = 10.4 Hz, 2H), 1.77 (d, J = 12.2 Hz, 2H), 1.25 (t, J = 1 1.4 Hz, 2H); LC-MS (Method D basic) 494.5 [M+H]+; RT 4.63 min
Example 12 -7-fluoro-5-{2-[4-[({3-oxo-2H.3H.4H-pyridor3.2-b][1.4]oxazin-6- yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1,21oxazolor3,4-c]quinolin-4-one L
Figure imgf000104_0001
Following the procedures of Example 7 but using 4-fluoro-1-methyl-2-nitrobenzene in step (a) 7-fluoro-5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-
1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one L was synthesised as a yellow solid.
1 H NMR (Method A) (CD3OD): δ ppm 9.55 (s, 1 H), 7.90 (dd, J = 8.6, 6.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.27 (dd, J = 1 1.6, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 7.13 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 6.99 (td, J = 8.6, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 6.85 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 4.51 (s, 2H), 4.35 (s, 2H), 4.35 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H), 3.00 (m, 2H), 2.59 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H), 2.46 (m, 1 H), 2.07 (m, 2H), 1.85 (m, 2H), 1.36 (m, 2H); LC-MS (Method D acidic) 493.4 [M+H]+; RT 4.01 min
Example 13 - 5-{2-r4-({2H,3H-[1,4]dioxinor2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1- yl]ethylV7-fluoro-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolor3,4-c]quinolin-4-one M
Figure imgf000104_0002
Following the procedures of Example 7 but using 4-fluoro-1-methyl-2-nitrobenzene in step (a) and using 2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridine-7-carbaldehyde in step (g) 5-{2-[4-({2H,3H- [1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}arnino)pipehdin-1-yl]ethyl}-7-fluoro-4H,5H- [1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one M was synthesised as a white solid. 1 H NMR (Method A) (CD3OD): δ ppm 9.55 (s, 1 H), 7.99 (m, 2H), 7.27 (dd, J = 11.6, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 6.99 (td, J = 8.3, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 6.84 (s, 1 H), 4.34 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H), 4.29-4.16 (m, 4H), 3.71 (bs, 2H), 3.00 (m, 2H), 2.59 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H), 2.49 (m, 1 H), 2.09 (t, J = 11.9 Hz, 2H), 1.91-1.77 (m, 2H), 1.45-1.30 (m, 2H); LC-MS (Method D acidic) 480.4 [M+H]+; RT 3.92 min
Example 14 - 5-{2-r4-({2H,3H-[1,4]dioxinor2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1- yl]ethyl}-7-methoxy-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolor3,4-c]quinolin-4-one N
Figure imgf000105_0001
Following the procedures of Example 7 but using 4-methoxy-1-methyl-2-nitrobenzene in step (a) and using 2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridine-7-carbaldehyde in step (g) 5-{2-[4- ({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-7-methoxy-4H,5H- [1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one_N was synthesised as a white solid.
1 H NMR (Method A) (CD3OD): δ ppm 9.55 (s, 1 H), 7.99 (s, 1 H), 7.84 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 6.88-7.01 (m, 3H), 4.47-4.26 (m, 6H), 3.90 (s, 3H), 3.77 (s, 2H), 3.10 (m, 2H), 2.67 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.54 (m, 1 H), 2.18 (m, 2H), 1.90 (m, 2H), 1.48 (m, 2H); LC-MS (Method C basic) 492.53 [M+H]+; RT 2.43 min
Example 15 - 5-{2-[4-[({3-oxo-2H.3H.4H-pyridor3.2-b][1.4]oxazin-6- yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolor3,4-c]1 ,5-naphthyridin-6-one
O
Figure imgf000106_0002
Following the procedures of Example 7 but using 2-methyl-3-nitro-pyridine in step (a) 5-(2- {4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H- [1,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]1,5-naphthyridin-6-one O was synthesised as an off white solid.
1H NMR (Method A) (DMSO-d6): δ ppm 11.07 (s, 1H), 10.15 (s, 1H), 8.51 (dd, J = 4.6, 1.2 Hz, 1H), 7.99 (dd, J = 8.7, 1.3 Hz, 1H), 7.58 (dd, J = 8.7, 4.6 Hz, 1H), 7.28 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.00 (d, J= 8.1 Hz, 1H), 4.60 (s, 2H), 4.37 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H), 4.00 (br. s, 1H), 3.67 (s, 2H), 2.90 (d, J= 11.3 Hz, 2H), 2.57 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 2H), 2.43-2.34 (m, 1H), 2.07 (td, J= 11.4, 2.5 Hz, 2H), 1.96 (br. s, 1H), 1.82-1.73 (m, 2H), 1.29-1.18 (m, 2H); LCMS (Method D basic) 476.4 [M+H]+; RT 5.59 min
Example 16 - 5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1.4]dioxinor2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1- yl]ethyl}-5H,6H-[1,2]oxazolor3,4-c]1,5-naphthyridin-6-one P
Figure imgf000106_0001
Following the procedures of Example 7 but using 2-methyl-3-nitro-pyridine in step (a) and using 2H,3H-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridine-7-carbaldehyde in step (g) 5-{2-[4-({2H,3H- [1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-5H,6H-[1,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]1,5- naphthyridin-6-one P was synthesised as an off white solid. 1H NMR (Method A) (CD3OD): δ ppm 9.63 (s, 1H), 8.37 (dd, J = 4.6, 1.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.95-7.86 (m, 2H), 7.46 (dd, J = 8.7, 4.7 Hz, 1 H), 6.83 (s, 1H), 4.37 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 4.28-4.22 (m, 2H), 4.22-4.15 (m, 2H), 3.64 (s, 2H), 2.95 (dd, J = 10.2, 5.6 Hz, 2H), 2.58 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.39 (tt, J = 10.7, 4.0 Hz, 1H), 2.06 (td, J = 11.7, 2.5 Hz, 2H), 1.86-1.76 (m, 2H), 1.40-1.25 (m, 2H); LC-MS (Method D basic) 463.4 [M+H]+; RT 5.74 min
Example 17 - 5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3.2-b][1,4]oxazin-6- yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1,2.4]triazolor4.3-a]quinoxalin-4-one Q
Figure imgf000107_0001
H
Following steps (e) to (g) of Example 7, but using 4H,5H-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]quinoxalin-4- one (prepared as described in European Journal of Medicinal Chemistry, 2013, 69, 115-124) in step (e) 5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1- yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]quinoxalin-4-one_Q was synthesised as an off white solid.
1H NMR (Method A) (CD3OD): δ ppm 9.61 (s, 1 H), 8.07 (dd, J = 8.2, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 7.60 (dd, J = 8.6, 1.3 Hz, 1 H), 7.52 (ddd, J = 8.6, 7.4, 1.3 Hz, 1H), 7.35 (ddd, J = 8.3, 7.2, 1.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.21-7.11 (m, 1H), 6.88 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 4.53 (d, J = 1.5 Hz, 2H), 4.45 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 2H), 3.78 (s, 2H), 3.08-2.99 (m, 2H), 2.66 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H), 2.62-2.53 (m, 1H), 2.09 (td, J = 11.7, 2.3 Hz, 2H), 1.88 (d, J = 12.6 Hz, 2H), 1.45-1.34 (m, 2H); LC-MS (Method C acidic) 475.4 [M+H]+; RT 0.86 min
Example 18 - 5-{2-[4-[({3-oxo-2H.3H.4H-pyridor3.2-b][1.4]oxazin-6- yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1.2,3,4]tetrazolori.5-a]quinoxalin-4-one R
Figure imgf000108_0002
Following steps (e) to (g) of Example 7, but using 4H,5H-[1,2,3,4]tetrazolo[1,5-a]quinoxalin- 4-one (prepared as described in Organic Chemistry: An Indian Journal, 2009, 5, 348-356) in step (e) 5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1- yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1,2,3,4]tetrazolo[1,5-a]quinoxalin-4-one R was synthesised as a white solid.
1H NMR (Method A) (DMSO-d6): δ ppm 11.12 (s, 1H), 8.39 (dd, J= 8.3, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (dd, J = 8.7, 1.2 Hz, 1H), 7.75 (ddd, J = 8.6, 7.2, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.55 (dd, J = 15.4, 1.1 Hz, 1H), 7.29 (d, J= 8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.02 (d, J= 8.1 Hz, 1H), 4.60 (s, 2H), 4.43 (t, J =7.2 Hz, 2H), 3.69 (s, 2H), 2.98-2.89 (m, 2H), 2.65-2.53 (m, 2H), 2.49-2.35 (m, 1H), 2.09 (td, J= 11.4, 2.5 Hz, 2H), 2.05-1.95 (m, 1H), 1.79 (d, J= 11.8 Hz, 2H), 1.32-1.23 (m, J= 11.5 Hz, 2H); LC- MS (Method D basic) 476.5 [M+H]+; RT 5.79 min
Example 19 - 5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1,4]dioxinor2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1- yl]ethyl}-4H.5lH-[.2.3.4]tetrazolo[1.5-a]quinoxalin-4-oneS
Figure imgf000108_0001
Following steps (e) to (g) of Example 7, but using 4H,5H-[1,2,3,4]tetrazolo[1,5-a]quinoxalin- 4-one (prepared as described in Organic Chemistry: An Indian Journal, 2009, 5, 348-356) in step (e) and using 2H,3H-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridine-7-carbaldehyde in step (g) 5-{2-[4- ({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmeth^
[1 ,2,3,4]tetrazolo[1 ,5-a]quinoxalin-4-one S was synthesised as an off white solid.
1 H NMR (Method A) (DMSO-d6): δ ppm 8.38 (dd, J = 8.1 , 1.4 Hz, 1 H), 8.01 (s, 1 H), 7.82 (dd, J = 8.6, 1.3 Hz, 1 H), 7.75 (ddd, J = 8.6, 7.3, 1.5 Hz, 1 H), 7.55 (ddd, J = 8.2, 7.2, 1.1 Hz, 1 H), 6.94 (s, 1 H), 4.43 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 4.37-4.31 (m, 2H), 4.31-4.24 (m, 2H), 3.70 (s, 2H), 2.93 (d, J = 10.9 Hz, 2H), 2.61 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.09 (td, J = 11.3, 2.4 Hz, 2H), 1.84- 1.76 (m, 2H), 1.43-1.06 (m, 3H); LC-MS (Method D basic) 463.5 [M+H]+; RT 5.73 min.
Example 20 - 6-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyridor3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6- yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-5H,6H-[1.2,4]triazolori .5-c]quinazolin-5-one T
(a) 5H,6H-[1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5-c]quinazolin-5-one
Figure imgf000109_0001
A mixture of ethyl N-(2-cyanophenyl)carbamate (3.75 g, 19.7 mmol) and formic hydrazide (1.18g, 19.7 mmol) in NMP (7 ml_) was heated at 160°C for 3 h. The reaction mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and H2O (50 ml_) added followed by pouring the mixture on to ice. The resulting precipitate was collected and washed with Et2O to afford 5H,6H-[1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5-c]quinazolin-5-one (2.08 g), which was used without further purification.
1 H NMR (Method A) (DMSO-d6): δ ppm 12.37 (s, 1 H), 8.57 (s, 1 H), 8.22 (dd, J = 7.8, 1.5 Hz, 1 H), 7.76 (ddd, J = 8.6, 7.4, 1.6 Hz, 1 H), 7.56-7.41 (m, 2H); LC-MS (Method C basic) 187.4 [M+H]+; RT 1.07 min
(b) 6-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1- yl}ethyl)-5H,6H-[1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5-c]quinazolin-5-one T
Figure imgf000110_0002
Following steps (e) to (g) of [Example 7, but using 5H,6H-[1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5-c]quinazolin-5- one (prepared as described in Example 20 step (a)) in step (e)_6-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H- pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-5H,6H-[1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5- c]quinazolin-5-one_T was synthesised as an off white solid.
1 H NMR (Method A) (DMSO-d6): δ ppm 11.14 (s, 1 H), 8.53 (s, 1 H), 8.27 (dd, J = 7.9, 1.6 Hz, 1 H), 7.81 (ddd, J = 8.7, 7.1 , 1.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.72 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 1 H), 7.48 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 1 H), 7.29 (d, J = 7.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.01 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 1 H), 4.60 (s, 2H), 4.42 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H), 3.71 (s, 2H), 2.92 (d, J = 11.1 Hz, 2H), 2.64 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H), 2.07 (t, J = 11.1 Hz, 2H), 1.79 (d, J = 12.1 Hz, 2H), 1.25 (m, 2H); LC-MS (Method C basic) 475.5 [M+H]+; RT 1.83 mm
Example 21 - 6-{2-r4-({2H,3H-[1.4]dioxinor2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1- vl]ethyl}-5H,6H-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-c]quinoxalin-5-one U
Figure imgf000110_0001
Following steps (e) to (g) of Example 7, but using 5H,6H-[1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5-c]quinazolin-5- one (prepared as described in Example 20 step (a)) in step (e) and using 2H,3H- [1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridine-7-carbaldehyde in step (g) 6-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3- c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-5H,6H-[1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5-c]quino^ U was synthesised as a white solid
1 H NMR (Method A) (DMSO-d6): δ ppm 8.57 (s, 1 H), 8.27 (dd, J = 7.9, 1.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.99 (s, 1 H), 7.81 (ddd, J = 8.8, 7.1 , 1.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.71 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 1 H), 7.48 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 1 H), 6.92 (s, 1 H), 4.42 (t, J = 6.9 Hz, 2H), 4.29 (ddd, J = 24.6, 5.8, 3.0 Hz, 4H), 3.67 (s, 2H), 2.90 (d, J = 1 1.1 Hz, 2H), 2.63 (t, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H), 2.38 (m, 1 H), 2.11-2.00 (m, 2H), 1.76 (d, J = 12.4 Hz, 2H), 1.25 (t, J = 11.0 Hz, 2H); LC-MS (Method C basic) 475.5 [M+H]+; RT 1.85 mm.
Example 22 - 8-(2-{4-r({3-oxo-2H.3H.4H-pyridor3.2-b][1,4]oxazin-6- yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)-3,5,6,8,10-pentaazatricvclor7.4.0.0 2,6]trideca- 1 (9),2,4,10.12-pentaen-7-one V
(a) 5H,6H-[1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5-c]quinazolin-5-one
Figure imgf000111_0001
Following Example 20 but using N-(3-cyanopyridin-2-yl)carbamate in step (a) 3,5,6,8, 10- pentaazatricyclo[7.4.0.0 2'6]trideca-1 (9),2,4, 10.12-pentaen-7-one was synthesised as an orange solid.
LC-MS (Method C, acidic) 188.4 [M+H]+; RT 1.12 min
(b) 8-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1- yl}ethyl)-3,5,6,8, 10-pentaazatricyclo[7.4.0.0 2'6]trideca-1 (9), 2, 4, 10.12-pentaen-7-one V
Figure imgf000111_0002
Following steps (e) to (g) of Example 7, but using 3,5,6,8, 10-pentaazatricyclo[7.4.0.0 2,6]trideca-1 (9),2,4, 10.12-pentaen-7-one (prepared as described in Example 22 step (a)) in step (e) 8-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1- yl}ethyl)-3,5,6,8, 10-pentaazatricyclo[7.4.0.0 2 (5]trideca-1 (9),2,4, 10.12-pentaen-7-one V was synthesised as a colourless solid.
1 H NMR (Method A) (CDCI3): δ ppm 8.73 (dd, J = 4.8, 1.9 Hz, 1 H), 8.64 (dd, J = 7.8, 1.8 Hz, 1 H), 8.34 (s, 1 H), 7.39 (dd, J = 7.8, 4.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.18 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 1 H), 6.91 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 1 H), 4.76 (t, J = 6.7 Hz, 2H), 4.61 (s, 2H), 3.80 (s, 2H), 3.07 (dd, J = 10.0, 5.4 Hz, 2H), 2.81 (t, J = 6.7 Hz, 2H), 2.54 (tt, J = 10.5, 4.0 Hz, 1 H), 2.15 (td, J = 1 1.5, 2.5 Hz, 3H), 1.87 (d, J = 12.5 Hz, 2H), 1.47-1.31 (m, 2H), 1.25 (d, J = 2.9 Hz, 1 H); LC-MS (method C basic) 476.5 [M+H]+; RT 1.74 min
Example 23 - 5-{2-hvdroxy-2-rtrans-4-r({3-oxo-2H.3H.4H-pyridor3.2-b][1.4]oxazin-6- yl}methyl)amino]cvclohexynethyl}-7-methoxy-4H,5H-[1,3]oxazolor4,5-c]quinolin-4-one
W
(a) trans 4-ethenylcyclohexan-1 -amine
Figure imgf000112_0001
A solution of tert-butyl N-(trans-4-ethenylcyclohexyl)carbamate (2.87 g, 12.7 mmol) in DCM at room temperature was treated with 4 M HCI in dioxane (20 ml_). After stirring for 90 min excess volatiles were removed and the resulting residue azeotroped with Et2O to give trans 4-ethenylcyclohexan-1 -amine (2.13 g) as a white solid, isolated as its hydrochloride salt.
1 H NMR (Method A) (DMSO-d6): δ ppm 7.95 (s, 2H), 5.67 (ddd, J = 17.1 , 10.4, 6.4 Hz, 1 H), 5.07-4.65 (m, 2H), 2.83 (tt, J = 1 1.8, 3.9 Hz, 1 H), 1.99-1.75 (m, 3H), 1.75-1.58 (m, 2H), 1.27 (qd, J = 12.6, 3.5 Hz, 2H), 1.18-0.91 (m, 2H)
(b) benzyl N-(trans-4-ethenylcyclohexyl)carbamate
Figure imgf000113_0002
To a suspension of the hydrochloride salt of trans 4-ethenylcyclohexan-1 -amine (190 mg, 1.18 mmol) and Et3N (0.57 ml_, 4.11 mmol) in DCM (5 ml_) was added benzyl chloroformate (0.4 ml_, 2.8 mmol). The resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. DCM was added and the organics washed with aq. 2 M HCI, followed by saturated aq. NaHCO3 and brine. The DCM phase was dried through a phase separator cartridge and concentrated in vacuo. The crude was purified by flash chromatography eluting with petroleum ether (40/60) to 30% EtOAc in petroleum ether (40/60) to give benzyl N-(trans-4- ethenylcyclohexyl)carbamate (60 mg, 19% yield) as a white greasy solid.
1 H NMR (Method A) (CDCI3): δ ppm 7.36 (d, J = 4.4 Hz, 4H), 7.33-7.28 (m, 1 H), 5.75 (ddd, J = 17.1 , 10.5, 6.5 Hz, 1 H), 5.09 (s, 2H), 5.00-4.87 (m, 2H), 4.56 (s, 1 H), 3.45 (s, 1 H), 2.05 (d, J = 11.3 Hz, 2H), 1.96-1.83 (m, 1 H), 1.79 (d, J = 12.7 Hz, 2H), 1.29-1.09 (m, 4H)
(c) benzyl N-(trans-4-(oxiran-2-yl)cyclohexyl)carbamate
Figure imgf000113_0001
To a solution of benzyl N-(trans-4-ethenylcyclohexyl)carbamate (599 mg, 2.31 mmol) in DCM (30 ml_) at 0°C was added mCPBA (1.06 g, 4.62 mmol). After stirring for 20 min the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for a further 2 h. A further portion of mCPBA (1.80 g, 10.4 mmol) was added and stirring continued for a further 1.5 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with DCM (300 ml_) and treated with aq. sodium thiosulphate (10% V/V, 50 ml_). After stirring for 10 min the layers were separated and the aq. layer further extracted with DCM (2 x 200 ml_). The combined organics were washed with saturated aq. Na2C03 (2 x 200 ml_), brine (300 ml_), dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo to give benzyl N-(trans-4-(oxiran-2-yl)cyclohexyl)carbamate (615 mg, 97% yield) as a white solid.
1 H NMR (Method A) (CDCI3): δ ppm 7.35 (d, J = 4.1 Hz, 4H), 7.31 (m, 1 H), 5.09 (s, 2H), 4.56 (s, 1 H), 3.46 (s, 1 H), 2.71 (dq, J = 6.8, 4.0 Hz, 2H), 2.51 (dd, J = 4.7, 2.9 Hz, 1 H), 2.12- 2.02 (m, 2H), 1.96 (dt, J = 12.9, 3.1 Hz, 1 H), 1.75 (dq, J = 12.3, 3.1 Hz, 1 H), 1.32-1.04 (m, 5H)
(d) benzyl N-[trans-4-(1-hydroxy-2-{7-methoxy-4-oxo-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-5- yl}ethyl)cyclohexyl]carbamate
Figure imgf000114_0001
To a suspension of 7-methoxy-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one (240 mg, 1.1 1 mmol) (prepared following the procedure of [Example 1 step (a) but using 7-methoxy-2,4- dihydro-1 H-3, 1-benzoxazine-2,4-dione) and benzyl N-(trans-4-(oxiran-2- yl)cyclohexyl)carbamate (900 mg, 3.27 mmol) in DMF (25 ml_) was added Cs2CO3 (720 mg, 1.33 mmol). The resulting reaction mixture was heated at 100°C for 6 h and allowed to cool to room temperature. The reaction mixture was treated with H2O (50 ml_) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 25 ml_). The combined organics were washed with H2O (2 x 50 ml_), brine (50 ml_), dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude was purified by flash chromatography eluting with 0-100% EtOAc in petroleum ether (40/60) to give benzyl N- [trans-4-(1-hydroxy-2-{7-methoxy-4-oxo-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-5- yl}ethyl)cyclohexyl]carbamate (68 mg, 1 1 %) as a white solid.
1 H NMR (Method A) (CDCI3): δ ppm 8.05 (s, 1 H), 7.92 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 1 H), 7.40-7.29 (m, 5H), 7.02-6.93 (m, 2H), 5.10 (s, 2H), 4.75 (dd, J = 14.9, 9.9 Hz, 1 H), 4.61 (s, 1 H), 4.25 (d, J = 14.9 Hz, 1 H), 3.93 (s, 3H), 3.88 (m, 1 H), 3.52 (m, 1 H), 3.02-2.93 (m, 1 H), 2.14 (t, J = 14.9 Hz, 3H), 1.97 (s, 1 H), 1.62 (m, 2H),1.43 (s, 2H), 1.30-1.17 (m, 1 H); LC-MS (method B acidic) 476.5 [M+H]+; RT 1.74 min 5-{2-hydroxy-2-[trans-4-aminocyclohexyl]ethyl}-7-methoxy-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-
Figure imgf000115_0001
A solution of benzyl N-[trans-4-(1-hydroxy-2-{7-methoxy-4-oxo-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5- c]quinolin-5-yl}ethyl)cyclohexyl]carbamate (68 mg, 0.14 mmol) in MeOH (10 ml_) was hydrogenated under H2 (1 atm) over Pd/C (82 mg). After stirring at room temperature for 4 h the reaction mixture was filtered through celite, which was washed with MeOH and DCM. The combined filtrates were concentrated in vacuo to give 5-{2-hydroxy-2-[trans-4- aminocyclohexyl]ethyl}-7-methoxy-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one (37 mg, 75% yield) as a light brown solid, which was used without further purification.
LC-MS (method B acidic) 358.44 [M+H]+; RT 1.27 min
(f) 5-{2-hydroxy-2-[trans-4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6- yl}methyl)amino]cyclohexyl]ethyl}-7-methoxy-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one W
Figure imgf000115_0002
A solution of 5-{2-hydroxy-2-[trans-4-aminocyclohexyl]ethyl}-7-methoxy-4H,5H- [1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one (50 mg, 0.12 mmol) and 3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2- b][1 ,4]oxazine-6-carbaldehyde (23.3 mg, 0.13 mmol) in a mixture of MeOH (1 ml_) and DMF (1 ml_) was stirred over 3A molecular sieves at room temperature for 30 min. Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (62 mg, 0.29 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture stirred for 17 h. The MeOH was removed in vacuo and the reaction mixture treated with a further quantity of sodium triacetoxyborohydride (25 mg, 0.12 mmol). After stirring for a further 90 min an aq. solution of NH4OH (3 drops) was added. The reaction mixture was filtered and the filtrate loaded onto a Redisep C18 silica cartridge and eluted with 5% to 95% ACN in H2O/0.1 % NH3 to give 5-{2-hydroxy-2-[trans-4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6- yl}methyl)amino]cyclohexyl]ethyl}-7-methoxy-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one W (2 mg, 3% yield) as an off white solid.
1 H NMR (Method A) (DMSO-d6): δ 11.04 (s, 1 H), 8.72 (s, 1 H), 7.91 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.35-7.19 (m, 2H), 7.09-6.99 (m, 2H), 4.67 (d, J = 5.7 Hz, 1 H), 4.61 (s, 2H), 4.46 (d, J = 14.4 Hz, 1 H), 4.25 (m, 1 H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 3.71 (s, 2H), 3.70 (m, 1 H), 2.34 (m, 1 H), 1.97 (m, 4H), 1.73 (d, J = 12.6 Hz, 1 H), 1.42 (m, 1 H), 1.22 (m, 2H), 1.04 (m, 2H); LC-MS (Method D basic) 520.5 [M+H]+; RT 5.65 min
Example 24 - Antibacterial susceptibility testing
Minimum Inhibitory Concentrations (MICs) versus planktonic bacteria are determined by the broth microdilution procedure according to the guidelines of the Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute. Methods for Dilution Antimicrobial Susceptibility Tests for Bacteria That Grow Aerobically; Approved Standard- Ninth Edition. CLSI document M07-A9, 2012). The broth dilution method involves a two-fold serial dilution of compounds in 96-well microtitre plates, giving a final concentration range of 0.25-128 μg/mL and a maximum final concentration of 1 % DMSO. The bacterial strains tested include the Gram-positive strains Staphylococcus aureus ATCC 29213, Staphylococcus aureus NRS1 , Staphylococcus aureus NRS74, Staphylococcus aureus NRS482, Staphylococcus epidermidis ATCC 12228, Staphylococcus epidermidis NRS101 , Streptococcus pneumoniae ATCC 49619, Streptococcus uberis DSM 20569, Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212, Enterococcus faecium ATCC 19434, the fluoroquinolone-resistant Enterococcus faecium ATCC 700221 and the Gram negative strains Acinetobacter baumannii NCTC 13420, Acinetobacter baumannii ATCC 19606, Enterobacter cloacae NCTC 13406, Escherichia coli ATCC 25922, E. coli ATCC BAA-2452, E. coli NCTC 13476, E. coli MG1655 and the gyrase A mutants E. coli MG1655 S83L and E. coli MG1655 D87G derived from the isogenic parent strain E. coli MG1655, four fluoroquinolone-resistant E. coli clinical isolates: CH440, CH460, CH418, CH448, Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 49247, Klebsiella pneumoniae ATCC 700603, Klebsiella pneumoniae NCTC 13443, Mycobacterium smegmatis ATCC 19420, Neisseria gonorrhoeae ATCC 49226, Neisseria meningitidis ATCC 13090, Pseudomonas aeruginosa ATCC 27853, Serratia marcescens ATCC 13880, Stenotrophomonas maltophilia ATCC 13637. Additionally, two fluoroquinolone-resistant mutant strains of each S. aureus ATCC 29213 and E. coli ATCC 25922 were generated in- house using a serial passage method with ciprofloxacin at sub-inhibitory concentrations. These strains are referred to as S. aureus SACPX1-SP25 and SACPX1-SP28 and E. coli ECCPX1-SP22 and ECCPX1-SP25.
Strains are grown in cation-adjusted Muller-Hinton broth (supplemented with 2% w/v NaCI in the case of methicillin-resistant S. aureus strains) or on Muller-Hinton agar at 37°C in an ambient atmosphere. The MIC is determined as the lowest concentration of compound that inhibits growth following a 16-20 h incubation period. The data reported correspond to the modes of three independent experiments and is reported in Tables 1-3.
The antimicrobial susceptibility profile of Clostridium difficile was determined by estimating MIC using the agar dilution method according to the guidelines of the CLSI criteria for anaerobes (Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute. Methods for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing of Anaerobic Bacteria; Approved Standard-Eighth Edition. CLSI document M11-A8, 2012). Stock solutions of vancomycin and ciprofloxacin were made in water at 5120 μg/mL. Stock solutions of compounds were made in DMSO at 12800 μg/mL. Compounds were diluted to 100 fold the test range concentrations in DMSO and 400 μΙ of the 100X solutions were added to 39.6 mL of Brucella blood agar supplemented with haemin and vitamin K1. Isolates were sub-cultured twice on Brucella blood agar plates at 35°C for 48 h in an anaerobic cabinet. Colonies were resuspended in Brucella broth to a turbidity of 0.5 Mc Fariand and 100 of the suspension was transferred to a 96-well plate. The antibacterial agent containing plates were inoculated with 1 μί of bacterial suspension using a Masturi® Dot inoculator. Plates were incubated at 35°C for 48 h in anaerobic conditions and MIC were read visually following CLSI guidelines. The MIC was defined as the lowest concentration of antimicrobial agent that inhibited visible growth.
The antimicrobial activity of compounds against M. tuberculosis H37Rv grown under aerobic conditions was assessed by measuring bacterial growth after 5 days in the presence of test compounds. Compounds were prepared as 20-point two-fold serial dilutions in DMSO and diluted into 7H9-Tw-OADC medium in 96-well plates with a final DMSO concentration of 2%. The highest concentration of compound was 200 μΜ where compounds were soluble in DMSO at 10 mM. Microbial growth was measured by OD590 and fluorescence (Ex 560/Em 590) using a BioTek™ Synergy 4 plate reader. To determine the MIC, the dose response curve was plotted as % growth and fitted to the Gompertz model using GraphPad Prism 5. The MIC was defined as the minimum concentration at which growth was completely inhibited and was calculated from the inflection point of the fitted curve to the lower asymptote (zero growth).
The strains tested include M. tuberculosis H37Rv, two isoniazid resistant strains, INH-R1 (derived from M. tuberculosis H37Rv KatG mutant, Y155 truncation) and INH-R2 (strain ATCC 35822), two rifampicin resistant strains, RIF-R1 (derived from H37Rv, RpoB S522L mutant) and RIF-R2 (strain ATCC 35828) and a fluoroquinolone resistant strain, FQ-R1 derived from H37Rv (GyrB D94N mutant).
Antimicrobial activity under low oxygen conditions
The antimicrobial activity of compounds against M. tuberculosis H37Rv grown under hypoxic conditions was assessed using the low oxygen recovery assay (LORA). Bacteria were first adapted to low oxygen conditions and then exposed to compounds under hypoxia. The method used was as described above for aerobic conditions with the following modifications: M. tuberculosis constitutively expressing the luxABCDE operon was inoculated into DTA medium in gas-impermeable glass tubes and incubated for 18 days to generate hypoxic conditions (Wayne model of hypoxia). At this point, bacteria are in a non-replicating state (NRP stage 2) induced by oxygen depletion. Oxygen-deprived bacteria were inoculated into compound assay plates and incubated under anaerobic conditions for 10 days followed by incubation under aerobic conditions (outgrowth) for 28h. Growth was measured by luminescence. Oxygen-deprived bacteria were also inoculated into compound assay plates and incubated under aerobic conditions for 5 days.
Intracellular activity assay
The activity of compounds against intracellular bacteria was determined by measuring viability in infected THP-1 cells (macrophage-like cells) after 3 days in the presence of test compounds. Compounds were prepared as 10-point three-fold serial dilutions in DMSO. The highest concentration of compound tested was 50 μΜ where compounds were soluble in DMSO at 10 mM. THP-1 cells were cultured in complete RPMI medium and differentiated into macrophage-like cells using 80 nM PMA overnight at 37°C, 5% C02. THP-1 cells were infected with a luminescent strain of H37Rv (which constitutively expresses luxABCDE) at a multiplicity of infection of 1 and incubated overnight at 37°C, 5% C02. Infected cells were recovered using Accutase/EDTA solution, washed twice with PBS to remove extracellular bacteria and seeded into assay pates. Compound dilutions were added to a final DMSO concentration of 0.5%. Assay plates were incubated for 72 h at 37°C, 5% C02. Relative luminescent units (RLU) were measured using a Biotek Synergy 2 plate reader. The dose response curve was fitted using the Levenberg-Marquardt algorithm. The IC50 was defined as the compound concentrations that produced 50% inhibition of microbial growth.
Antimicrobial activity against other mycobacteria
The activity of compounds against Mycobacterium abscessus subsp. bollettii 103 and Mycobacterium avium subsp. avium 2285 was assessed under aerobic conditions by determining the MIC as described previously and with the following modifications:
M. abscessus plates were inoculated and incubated for 3 days at 37°C; growth was measured by OD590. The dose response curve was plotted as % growth and fitted to the Gompertz model and the MIC was defined as the minimum concentration at which growth was completely inhibited and was calculated from the inflection point of the fitted curve to the lower asymptote (zero growth).
M. avium plates were inoculated and incubated for 5 days at 37°C and Alamar blue was added to each well (10 μΙ_ of Alamar blue to 100 μΙ_ culture) and incubated for a further 24 h at 37°C. Plates were visually inspected and the colour recorded for each well. MIC was defined as the lowest concentration at which no metabolic activity was seen (blue well).
The results are shown in Table 6.
Figure imgf000120_0001
Figure imgf000121_0001
Figure imgf000122_0001
Figure imgf000123_0001
Figure imgf000124_0001
In Tables 1 , 2 and 3 an MIC (in μς/Γηί.) of less or equal to 1 is assigned the letter A; a MIC of from 1 to 10 is assigned the letter B; a MIC of from 10 to 100 is assigned the letter C; and a MIC of over 100 is assigned the letter D.
All compounds tested show activity against both Gram-negative and Gram-positive bacteria. Compounds E, F, G and J in particular, exhibited excellent activity against both Gram- negative and Gram-positive bacteria. Compounds A, C, E, F, G and J exhibited excellent activity against all strains of S. aureus tested, including those which are resistant to fluoroquinolone antibiotics and other antibiotics. Compound B also showed significant activity against all strains tested. Compounds E, F, G, J, L, M, N and O exhibited excellent activity against all strains of E. coli tested, including fluoroquinolone-resistant strains. Compounds E, F, G, J, L, M and N also showed significant activity against clinical isolates.
Table 3 - Potency of reference compounds and test compound A against methicillin- resistant Staphylococcus epidermidis strain
Figure imgf000125_0001
MRSE = methicillin-resistant S. epidermidis
Compound A shows good activity against MRSE. Notably, the compound's activity against MRSE is broadly the same as its activity against wild-type S. epidermidis.
Table 4 - Fold increase in MIC against fluoroquinolone-resistant single point mutant Escherichia coli strains (MG1655 S83L and MG1655 D87G) compared to the isogenic parent strain E. coli MG1655.
Figure imgf000126_0001
CIP = ciprofloxacin; LEV = levofloxacin
1 : S83L mutation on DNA gyrase subunit GyrA
2: D87G mutation on DNA gyrase subunit GyrA
Compounds A-0 showed no significant loss of activity against the E. coli MG1655 mutant strains.
Table 5 - Fold increase in MIC against fluoroquinolone-resistant multiple points mutant Escherichia coli strains (ECCPX1 -SP22 and ECCPX1 -SP25) compared to the isogenic parent strain E. coli ATCC 25922.
Figure imgf000126_0002
Figure imgf000127_0001
CIP = ciprofloxacin; LEV = levofloxacin
1 : double mutation on DNA gyrase subunit GyrA: S83L and D87G
2: triple mutation on DNA gyrase subunit GyrA: S83L and D87G, and on DNA topoisomerase IV subunit ParC: E84K
Thus, compounds B, C, D, E, F, J, and O showed an eight-fold increase in MIC against both FQR mutant strains compared to the wild-type parent strain E. coli ATCC 25922 and were less susceptible to the gyrase S83L and D87G mutations than the fluoroquinolone antibiotics. Compound N showed a four-fold increase in MIC against both FQR mutant strains compared to the wild-type parent strain E. coli ATCC 25922 and was less susceptible to the gyrase S83L and D87G mutations than the fluoroquinolone antibiotics and the other compounds tested.
Table 6 - MIC against mycobacterial strains. CIP: ciprofloxacin, NOV: Novobiocin, RIF: rifampicin, MXF: moxifloxacin.
Figure imgf000127_0002
Figure imgf000128_0001
In Table 6 a MIC (in μg/mL) of less than or equal to 1 is assigned the letter A; a MIC of from 1 to 10 is assigned the letter B; a MIC of from 10 to 100 is assigned the letter C; and a MIC of over 100 is assigned the letter D.
Compound F showed excellent activity against M. smegmatis ATCC 19420 and against the virulent strain M. tuberculosis H37Rv in aerobic conditions. Compound F also showed excellent activity against intracellular bacteria and retained good activity against M. tuberculosis strains resistant isoniazid (INH-R), rifampicin (RIF-R) and fluoroquinolone (FQ- R). Compound F also showed good activity against non-tuberculosis strains such as M. avium and M. abscessus.
Table 7 - MIC against Clostridium difficile strains. CIP: ciprofloxacin, VAN: vancom cin
Figure imgf000128_0002
Figure imgf000129_0001
In Table 7 a MIC (in μg/mL) of less than or equal to 1 is assigned the letter A; a MIC of from 1 to 10 is assigned the letter B; a MIC of from 10 to 100 is assigned the letter C; and a MIC of over 100 is assigned the letter D.
Compound N showed excellent activity against all C. difficile strains tested, including ciprofloxacin-resistant strains.
Example 25 - Human cell viability assay
Compounds are assessed for potential non-specific cytotoxic effects against a human hepatic cell line (HepG2 ATCC HB-8065). HepG2 cells are seeded at 20,000 cells/well in 96-well microtitre plates in minimal essential medium (MEM) supplemented with a final concentration of 10% FBS and 1 mM sodium pyruvate. After 24 h compound dilutions are prepared in Dulbecco's minimum essential media (DM EM) supplemented with final concentrations of 0.001 % FBS, 0.3% bovine albumin and 0.02% HEPES and added to cells. Compounds are tested in two-fold serial dilutions over a final concentration range of 1-128 μg/mL in a final DMSO concentration of 1 % vol/vol. Chlorpromazine is used as a positive control. Cells are incubated with compound at 37°C and 5% CO2 for a further 24 h, after which time the CellTiter-Glo reagent (Promega) is added. Luminescence is measured on a BMG Omega plate reader. Data are analysed using GraphPad Prism software to determine the concentration of compound that inhibits cell viability by fifty percent (IC50). The results are provided in Table 8.
In Table 8, an IC50 (in μg/mL) of less than 1 is assigned the letter D; an IC50 of from 1 to 10 is assigned the letter C; an IC50 of from 10 to 100 is assigned the letter B; and an IC50 of over 100 is assigned the letter A. Table 8 - ICso values against HepG2 cell line
Figure imgf000130_0001
Thus, the tested compounds show low toxicities against human hepatic cell lines. In particular, compound A showed no detectable toxicity against human hepatic cell lines. Compound A therefore shows an excellent therapeutic benefit relative to its hepatic toxicity as expressed by the ratio of hepatic toxicity. In particular, compounds A, C, D, F, O, R, S, T and U showed no detectable toxicity against the tested human hepatic cell lines. These compounds therefore show an excellent therapeutic benefit relative to their hepatic toxicities. Compounds E, G, H, I, J and N also demonstrate an acceptable level of hepatic toxicity relative to therapeutic activity. This indicates that these compounds have the potential to have an excellent therapeutic benefit relative to their hepatic toxicity.

Claims

1. A a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or N-oxide thereof:
Figure imgf000131_0001
wherein R1 is selected from R2 or R3
R2 represents the group:
X1 and X2 are each independently selected from: N and CR4; X3 is independently selected from: N, C=0 and CR4; X4 is selected from N, NR2, NR3, CR2 and CR4; wherein a single one of R1 and X4 comprises the group R2; and wherein no more than two of X1 , X2, X3 and X4 are N;
the bond between X3 and X4 is a single bond or a double bond; wherein when X4 is NR2 or NR3, the bond between X3 and X4 is a single bond and X3 is C=0; and when X4 is selected from N, CR2 and CR4 the bond between X3 and X4 is a double bond and X3 is selected from N and CR4;
Y1 and Y2 are each independently selected from C and N; Z1, Z2 and Z3 are each independently selected from O, S, S(O), NR5, CR4 and C=W; wherein W is selected from O, S or NR6; wherein when none of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is C=W, then the ring formed by Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 contains two endocyclic double bonds, and when one of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is C=W, then the ring formed by Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 contains a single endocyclic double bond; and with the further provisos that at least one of Z1 , Z2, Z3, Y1 and Y2 is O, S, N or NR5 and that no more than one of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is C=W;
=A is independently selected from: =0, =S, =NR6 and =NOR6;
L1 is a linker group having the form -(CR9R9)гU1-U2-(CR9R9)s-U3-(CR9R10)r; wherein U1 , U2 and U3 are each independently selected from: a bond, CO, O, S and NR11 ; wherein r, s, and t are each independently an integer selected from 0, 1 , 2 and 3 and wherein definitions of r, s, t, U1 , U2 and U3 are chosen such that the total length of the linker group is 1 , 2, 3 or 4 atoms;
L2 is 4-, 5-, 6- or 7-membered cycloalkyl ring or a 4-, 5-, 6- or 7- membered heterocycloalkyl ring; L3 is absent or is -N(R8)L4-;
L4 is independently selected from -CR9R9- and a 3-, 4- or 5-membered cycloalkyl ring or a 4- or 5-membered heterocycloalkyl ring;
R3 and R11 are each independently at each occurrence selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4- haloalkyl, S(O)2-C1-C4-alkyl and C(O)-C1-C4-alkyl;
R4 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, halo, nitro, cyano, NR6R11 , NR6S(O)2R6, NR6CONR6R6, NR6C(O)R6, NR6CO2R6, OR6; O-aryl, SR6, SOR6, SO3R6, SO2R6, SO2NR6R6 CO2R6, C(O)R6, CONR6R6, aryl, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl;
R5 is absent or is independently selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, and C1-C4-haloalkyl;
R6 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, and C1-C4-haloalkyl; R7 is a monocyclic aromatic or heteroaromatic ring or R7 is a bicyclic carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system in which at least one of the two rings is aromatic or heteroaromatic; R8 is independently selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-haloalkyl, S(O)2-C1-C4-alkyl and C(O)-C1-C4-alkyl; or L2 and R8 together with the nitrogen to which they are attached together form a saturated 5-, 6- or 7- membered monocyclic heterocycloalkyl ring or a saturated 7-, 8- or 9- membered bicyclic heterocycloalkyl ring system;
R9 is independently at each occurrence selected from: H, Me, and CF3 ;
R10 is independently at each occurrence selected from: R9, OR6, CO2R6 and NR6R11 ;
wherein each of the aforementioned alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, haloalkyl, cycloalkyl, carbocyclic, heterocycloalkyl, aryl (e.g. phenyl) and heteroaryl groups and aromatic and heteroaromatic rings is optionally substituted, where chemically possible, by 1 to 5 substituents which are each independently at each occurrence selected from the group consisting of: =0, =S, =NRa, =NORa, halo, nitro, cyano, NRaRa, NRaS(O)2Ra, NRaC(O)Ra, NRaCONRaRa, NRaCO2Ra, ORa; SRa, SORa, SO3Ra, SO2Ra, SO2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, CRaRaNRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl; wherein Ra is independently at each occurrence selected from H, C1-C4 alkyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl.
2. A compound of claim 1 , wherein the compound of formula (I) is a compound of formula (III):
Figure imgf000132_0001
wherein X4 is N or CR4.
3. A compound of claim 1 or claim 2, wherein both Y1 and Y2 are C, a single one of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is N and that N must form part of a C=N endocyclic double bond; a single one of Z1 , Z2 and Z3 is CR4 and the remaining Z1 , Z2 or Z3 is selected from O and S.
4. A compound of claim 1 , wherein the compound of formula (I) has a structure selected from any one or more of formulae (VIII) and (IX) to (XXXXXVII):
Figure imgf000133_0001
Figure imgf000134_0001
Figure imgf000135_0001
Figure imgf000136_0001
wherein R5 is independently selected from: H, C1-C4-alkyl, and C1-C4-haloalkyl.
5. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein X1 , X2 and X4 are each CH.
6. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein X1 is N and wherein X2 and X4 are each CH.
7. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein X3 is CR4a, wherein R4a is selected from halo, CN, NR6R11 , OR6, O-aryl, SR6.
8. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein -L1-L2- takes the form:
Figure imgf000137_0001
wherein R12 is independently at each occurrence selected from: halo, nitro, cyano, NRaRa, NRaS(O)2Ra, NRaCONRaRa, NRaC(O)Ra, NRaCO2Ra, ORa; SRa, S(O)Ra, S(O)2ORa, S(O)2Ra, S(O)2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl, and C1-C4- haloalkyl; or any two R12 groups which are attached to the same carbon form a group selected from: =0, =S, =NRa and =NORa; and n is an integer selected from 0, 1 , 2, 3 and 4.
A compound of any of claims 1 to 7, wherein -L1-L2- takes the form:
Figure imgf000137_0002
wherein R12 is independently at each occurrence selected from: halo, nitro, cyano, NRaRa, NRaS(O)2Ra, NRaCONRaRa, NRaC(O)Ra, NRaCO2Ra, ORa; SRa, S(O)Ra, S(O)2ORa, S(O)2Ra, S(O)2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl, and C1-C4- haloalkyl; or any two R12 groups which are attached to the same carbon form a group selected from: =0, =S, =NRa and =NORa; and n is an integer selected from 0, 1 , 2, 3 and 4.
A compound of any of claims 1 to 7, wherein -L1-L2- takes the form:
Figure imgf000137_0003
wherein W1 is N or CR13; R12 is independently at each occurrence selected from: halo, nitro, cyano, NRaRa, NRaS(O)2Ra, NRaCONRaRa, NRaC(O)Ra, NRaCO2Ra, ORa; SRa, S(O)Ra, S(O)2ORa, S(O)2Ra, S(O)2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C4-alkynyl, and C1-C4-haloalkyl; or any two R12 groups which are attached to the same carbon form a group selected from: =0, =S, =N Ra and =NORa; R13 is independently selected from H and R12; and n is an integer selected from 0, 1 , 2, 3 and 4.
11. A compound of any of claims 1 to 7, wherein -L1-L2-N(R8)- takes the form:
Figure imgf000138_0001
wherein R12 is independently at each occurrence selected from: halo, nitro, cyano, NRaRa, NRaS(O)2Ra, NRaCONRaRa, NRaC(O)Ra, NRaCO2Ra, ORa; SRa, S(O)Ra, S(O)2ORa, S(O)2Ra, S(O)2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl, and C1-C4- haloalkyl; or any two R12 groups which are attached to the same carbon form a group selected from: =0, =S, =NRa and =NORa; and n is an integer selected from 0, 1 , 2, 3 and 4.
12. A compound of any of claims 1 to 10, wherein L3 is -N(R8)L4-.
13. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein L4 is -CR9R9-.
14. A compound of any of claims 1 to 10, wherein L3 is absent.
15. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 14, wherein R7 is a phenyl group which is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents which are each independently at each occurrence selected from the group consisting of: halo, nitro, cyano, NRaRa, NRaS(O)2Ra, NRaCONRaRa, NRaCO2Ra, NRaC(O)Ra, ORa; SRa, SORa, SO3Ra, SO2Ra, SO2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl, C1-C4- haloalkyl, and CRaRaNRaRa.
16. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 14, wherein R7 takes the form: wherein V1 , V2 and V3 are each independently selected from: N and CR4; with the proviso that no more than two of V1 , V2 and V3 are N; and wherein the ring B is a substituted or unsubstituted 5- or 6- membered saturated cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl ring.
17. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 14, wherein R7 may also take the form
Figure imgf000139_0001
wherein V6 is independently selected from N and CR4; V7 is independently selected from NR11 , S and O; and R15 is independently at each occurrence selected from: halo, nitro, cyano, NRaRa, NRaS(O)2Ra, NRaC(O)Ra, NRaCONRaRa, NRaCO2Ra, NRaC(O)Ra, ORa; SRa, SORa, SO3Ra, SO2Ra, SO2NRaRa, CO2Ra C(O)Ra, CONRaRa, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl, C1-C4-haloalkyl, and CRaRaNRaRa. R15 may be independently at each occurrence selected from F, CN, ORa, nitro, C1-C4-alkyl, C2- C4-alkenyl, C2-C4-alkynyl and C1-C4-haloalkyl.
18. A compound of claim 1 , wherein the compound is a compound selected from:
5- {2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-4H,5H
[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one A;
6- ({[1-(2-{4-oxo-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-5-yl}ethyl)piperidin-4-yl]amino}methyl)- 3,4-dihydro-2H-1 ,4-benzoxazin-3-one B;
5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-7-methoxy- 4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one C;
5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-7-fluoro- 4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one D;
7- methoxy-5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin- 1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one E;
7-fluoro-5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1- yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one F;
5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl)- 4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one G; Example 8 - 5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}- 4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one H;
7-fluoro-5-{2-[4-({2H,3H,4H-pyrano[2,3-c]pyridin-6-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}- 4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one I;
7-methoxy-5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin- 1-yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one J;
7-fluoro-5-(2-{4-[({7-oxo-6H,7H,8H-pyrimido[5,4-b][1 ,4]oxazin-2-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1- yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one K;
7-fluoro-5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1- yl}ethyl)-4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one L;
5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}- 4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one M;
5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-7-m
4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]quinolin-4-one N;
5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl) 4H,5H-[1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]1 ,5-naphthyridin-6-one O;
5-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-4H,6h- [1 ,2]oxazolo[3,4-c]1 ,5-naphthyridin-6-one P;
5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl) 4H,5H-[1 ,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]quinoxalin-4-one Q;
5-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl) 4H,5H-[1 ,2,3,4]tetrazolo[1 ,5-a]quinoxalin-4-one R;
5- {2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-4H,5h- [1 ,2,3,4]tetrazolo[1 ,5-a]quinoxalin-4-one S;
6- (2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6-yl}methyl)amino]piperidin-1-yl}ethyl) 5H,6H-[1 ,2,4]triazolo[1 ,5-c]quinazolin-5-one T;
6-{2-[4-({2H,3H-[1 ,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl}amino)piperidin-1-yl]ethyl}-5H,6h- 8-(2-{4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin^
3,5,6,8, 10-pentaazatricyclo[7.4.0.0 2 ,6]trideca-1 (9),2,4, 10.12-pentaen-7-one V; and
5-{2-hydroxy-2-[trans-4-[({3-oxo-2H,3H,4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1 ,4]oxazin-6- yl}methyl)amino]cyclohexyl]ethyl}-7-methoxy-4H,5H-[1 ,3]oxazolo[4,5-c]quinolin-4-one W; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or N-oxide thereof.
19. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 18, for medical use.
20. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 18, for veterinary use.
21. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 18, for use in treating a bacterial or mycobacterial infection.
22. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 18, for the use of claim 21 , wherein the infection is caused by a Gram-positive bacteria.
23. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 18, for the use of claim 21 , wherein the infection is caused by a Gram-negative bacteria.
24. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 18, for the use of any one of claims 21 to 22, wherein the infection which is caused by a bacterial strain which is resistant to at least one approved antibacterial drug.
25. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 18, for the use of claim 24, wherein the strain is resistant to at least one fluoroquinolone antibacterial drug.
26. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 18, for the use of any one of claims 21 to 25, wherein the infection which is caused by an anaerobic bacteria.
28. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 18, for the use of claim 21 , wherein the infection is caused by mycobacteria.
29. A compound of any one of claims 1 to 18, for the use of claim 28, wherein the infection which is caused by a mycobacterial strain which is resistant to at least one approved antimycobacterial drug.
PCT/GB2015/052303 2014-08-11 2015-08-10 Antibacterial compounds Ceased WO2016024096A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
GB1414205.3 2014-08-11
GBGB1414205.3A GB201414205D0 (en) 2014-08-11 2014-08-11 Antibacterial compounds
GB1417941.0 2014-10-10
GB201417941A GB201417941D0 (en) 2014-10-10 2014-10-10 Antibacterial compounds

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016024096A1 true WO2016024096A1 (en) 2016-02-18

Family

ID=53835477

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/GB2015/052303 Ceased WO2016024096A1 (en) 2014-08-11 2015-08-10 Antibacterial compounds

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2016024096A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2017046606A1 (en) * 2015-09-18 2017-03-23 Redx Pharma Plc Antibacterial compounds
WO2017046603A1 (en) * 2015-09-18 2017-03-23 Redx Pharma Plc Antibacterial compounds and new uses thereof

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5683998A (en) * 1991-04-23 1997-11-04 Toray Industries, Inc. Tricyclic triazolo derivatives, processes for producing the same and the uses of the same
EP1972629A1 (en) * 2007-03-23 2008-09-24 Mutabilis SA New imidazolo-heteroaryl derivatives with antibacterial properties
WO2012078633A2 (en) * 2010-12-07 2012-06-14 Philadelphia Health And Education Corporation, D/B/A Drexel University College Of Medicene Methods of inhibiting metastasis from cancer

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5683998A (en) * 1991-04-23 1997-11-04 Toray Industries, Inc. Tricyclic triazolo derivatives, processes for producing the same and the uses of the same
EP1972629A1 (en) * 2007-03-23 2008-09-24 Mutabilis SA New imidazolo-heteroaryl derivatives with antibacterial properties
WO2012078633A2 (en) * 2010-12-07 2012-06-14 Philadelphia Health And Education Corporation, D/B/A Drexel University College Of Medicene Methods of inhibiting metastasis from cancer

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2017046606A1 (en) * 2015-09-18 2017-03-23 Redx Pharma Plc Antibacterial compounds
WO2017046603A1 (en) * 2015-09-18 2017-03-23 Redx Pharma Plc Antibacterial compounds and new uses thereof

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11952380B2 (en) Substituted bicyclic heterocyclic compounds as PRMT5 inhibitors
US10385065B2 (en) Antibacterial compounds
JP6898914B2 (en) Colony Stimulating Factor-1 Receptor (CSF-1R) Inhibitor
US20190209537A1 (en) Thiazolecarboxamides and pyridinecarboxamide compounds useful as pim kinase inhibitors
KR101272263B1 (en) 8-methoxy-9h-isothiazolo[5,4-b]quinoline-3,4-diones and related compounds as anti-infective agents
NZ228847A (en) Pyrido -benzoxazine, -benzothiazine and -quinoxaline derivatives; preparatory processes and pharmaceutical compositions
JP2021525745A (en) New oxoquinolidine compounds for the treatment and prevention of bacterial infections
WO2016067009A1 (en) Compounds with activity against bacteria and mycobacteria
KR101803866B1 (en) 5-benzylaminomethyl-6-aminopyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine derivatives as cholesteryl ester-transfer protein(cetp) inhibitors useful for the treatment of atherosclerosis
WO2016024096A1 (en) Antibacterial compounds
WO2017046605A1 (en) Antibacterial compounds
EP3414245A1 (en) Antibacterial compounds
US10487093B2 (en) Heterocyclic compounds, in particular 2-oxo-4,4,5,5,6,6,7,7-octahydrobenzoxazole derivatives, and their use as antibacterial compounds
WO2017046603A1 (en) Antibacterial compounds and new uses thereof
RS64146B1 (en) OXAZOLIDINONE ANTIBIOTIC COMPOUNDS AND PROCEDURE FOR PRODUCING THEM
JP7465266B2 (en) Tricyclic compounds for the treatment and prevention of bacterial infections
CN111527093B (en) Antibacterial Heterocyclic Compounds and Their Synthesis
US20230303562A1 (en) Pyrazole compound and preparation method therefor and use thereof
EP3414246A1 (en) Antibacterial compounds
CN107108646A (en) Argenocardins and their use as antibacterial agents
WO2015114317A1 (en) 5h-isothiazolo[4,5-c]pyridine-3,4-dione or 5h-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridin-3,4-dione as antibacterial compounds
GB2547740A (en) Antibacterial compounds
WO2017046606A1 (en) Antibacterial compounds
EP3898639A1 (en) Oxopyrido[1,2-a]pyrimidine compounds for the treatment and prophylaxis of bacterial infection
WO2016189304A1 (en) Antibacterial compounds

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15749871

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 15749871

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1